Brochure 2011 lo-res

General brochure 2011

“more than firedoors“

www.ninz.it

1Each of the above chapters is also accessible online www.ninz.it

Main index NINZ

COMPANY PRESENTATION 2 - 3

FIRE DOORS Univer and Proget 4 - 33

MULTIPURPOSE DOORS Rever, Univer and Proget 34 - 79

PAINTING AND NDD DECORATIONS 80 - 87

DOOR ACCESSORIES devices and panic bars 88 - 149

GATES – sliding, telescopic, vertically sliding and hinged 150 - 199

GLAZINGS, windows, glazed doors and accessories 200 - 243

2

CO

MPA

NY

NINZ Fire doorsCompany presentation

PRESENTATION - THE RELIABILITY OF EXPERIENCE

Ninz S.p.A. is Italy’s leading producer of fire doors with a 70% market share. Consolidated experience in the sector, familiarity with standards and optimal quality-price ratios are the company’s most distinguishing features. Over the years it has broadened its offer to include multipurpose metal doors and a wide range of accessories. In addition to Italy, Ninz S.p.A. also markets its products in numerous other European countries like France, Greece, Portugal, Romania, Spain, Slovenia... and countries outside of Eu-rope like Turkey, Russia and Panama.

Production takes place in two different facilities - Bolzano and Ala (TN), where the offices for research and develop-ment, sales and logistics are also located. In Ala a third facility is currently under construction designed to further enhance production capacity.

From its beginnings as a small family-owned metal works company in 1953, over the years the company has evolved to become a major industrial player with 250 employees. The main impetus for growth came from its owner, Karl Ninz, who first introduced the production of fire doors in 1976.

PRODUCTION - VERSATILITY AND DESIGN

The daily production capacity is 2000 doors, which are currently divided into the PROGET line (fire rated and multipurpose), the UNIVER line (fire rated and multipur-pose) and REVER line (multipurpose). Products are made to order for even the smallest quantities, satisfying the most demanding customers thanks to the wide variety of colors, accessories and windows available.

Customization of the product reaches a pinnacle with the NDD technology (Ninz Digital Decor), a trademark, NINZ decorative painting which permits any theme (words, pic-tures, logos) to be reproduced on the door-leaf surface. As an expression of the NDD claim, fire doors are trans-formed into versatile design elements at the disposal of architects and designers.This project earned the company the prestigious “Design Security & Safety Award” in 2007

CO

MPA

NY

3

NINZ Fire doorsCompany presentation

MARKETING - A SERVICE-ORIENTED PERSPECTIVE

Thanks to their reliability and quality, Ninz fire doors are used throughout Italy and in many countries across the world in public buildings where safety is at a premium: schools, hospitals, convention centers, shopping malls, manufacturing sites, hotels, museums...

The distribution within Italy is capillary thanks to a dense network of retailers supported by over one hundred sales agents.Punctual delivery - one of the company’s strongest points - is guaranteed by the careful planning of the production and by the quality transport services, which are both or-ganized in-house.The service that Ninz S.p.A. offers its customers is com-pleted by the internal technical-sales office, which assists agents and customers in the pre- and post-sales phases, and by the fitting office, which directly follows product installations at the customer’s request.

For international distribution, Ninz S.p.A. draws on (de-pending on the country) agents, exclusive retailers and networks of retailers supported by a dedicated internal technical-sales office.

Daily shipment to France is possible thanks to the special wooden-crates packaging and the local logistics network that has been created. Due to its great success, this service will soon be extended to other European countries.

DESIGN AND RESEARCH - EYES ON THE FUTURE

Continuous product improvements are managed by a team of expert engineers and technicians, who combine scrupu-lous attention to fire regulations with the practical con-cerns of builders, installers and locksmiths. This research, for instance, has generated certified installation methods for mounting fire doors on different types of support structures, such as masonry, plasterboard and sub-frames.

Thanks to the in-depth study of foreign standards, Ninz S.p.A. has also succeeded in certifying its products in a number of foreign countries, including France, Slovenia, Russia, Romania...

For long the company has been preparing itself for the marking’s coming into force by designing and developing innovative fire doors that meet the new European stand-ards. The product represents a new conceptualization dif-ferent from all that has been in terms of aesthetics as well as functionality, promising excellent performance in every possible setting.

“state of the art in fire protection technology“

UNIVER NINZ DoorsFIRE RATED VERSION

FEATURES 6 - 9

SPECIFIC OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 10 - 11

DOOR CROSS SECTIONS - MEASUREMENTS 12

INSTALLATION METHODS 13

ORDER MEASUREMENTS 14

OPENING MEASUREMENTS - ENCUMBRANCE 15

All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced technical changes to the contents of this brochure. Fire-rated closures are typically used for internal compartmentalization and have been designed for this purpose.

6

UN

IVER

fire

do

or One-leaved doors available in the following classes:

EI230 EI260 EI290 EI260 - Sm - C5 EI230 EI260 EI290 REI 60 REI 90REI 30 REI 60 REI 90REI 30

Two-leaved doors available in the following classes:

EI260 - Sm - C5 EI230 EI260 EI290 REI 60 REI 90REI 30 REI 60 REI 90REI 30

*except in combination with certain optional accessories

NOTEThe colors represented in the photos are not standard.

Features UNIVER Fire doors

WHAT MAKES THEM SPECIAL?

“Quality first”-- Fully galvanized door, including the “hidden” parts-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal-- Corrosion protection also provided along cut edges of the metal sheets-- Painted with epoxy-polyester thermoset powders in a 180 degrees (Celsius) oven-- Substantial paint layer (70 microns plus)-- Optimal corrosion resistance demonstrated by 500 hour salt-fog test-- Unaffected by severe climate changes, demonstrated by 2000 hours with +60° to -10° cycles at 75% humidity-- Finishing with high-quality aesthetics-- Orange skin anti-scratch structured paint-- Customizable with wide selection of RAL colors

“Practicality of use”-- Door reversibility*-- Indication of door opening direction not necessary-- Reduction of stock for retailers-- Simplifies choices for end customers-- Multiple installation methods for each door-- Type approvals for anchors for mortar fixing or expan-sion screws

“Conformity to standards”-- In-house Ninz R&D with specialized testing equipment-- Fire testing in accordance with UNI 9723 and EN 1634-1-- Mechanical testing for the marking of accessories-- -marked door accessories studied and sized to meet standard European requirements-- Careful selection of materials and manufacturing methods-- Strict product testing for conformity to declared technical

standards-- Absolute functional certainty over time-- Doors “type approved” in compliance with M.D. 21 June 2004-- Products delivered with the documentation required by current regulations

“Manufacturing technology” -- Manufacturing in modern and functional facilities which employ the latest technologies to maintain high quality levels and product uniformity-- The entire production process - from raw materials to painted and packaged products - takes place inside Ninz’s own facilities, ensuring a 360 degree door control

Left Right Left Right


7

UN

IVER

fire

do

orSTANDARD ELEMENTS FOR VERSIONS EI230 -

EI260, EI290 - REI 60 - REI 120

which comprise comprise Univer fire doors:

Door leaf -- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal, press folded and electro welded-- Perimetral rebate on 4 sides-- Internally reinforced with hot-galvanized steel profiles-- Heat-insulated with treated mineral wool-- Internal stiffeners for overhead door closer and panic bar-- 50 or 60 mm thickness, depending on fire rating

Doorframe -- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal-- Grooves for thermo expansive sealing and rebate sealing-- Suitable for anchors for mortar fixing or expansion screws-- Detachable rebate for application on finished flooring-- Removable threshold for thresholdless installation-- Strike plates in PA6 black nylon for lock bolt and safety bolts-- Assembled doorframes for one-leaved doors-- Assembly required for two-leaved doorframes

Thermo expansive sealing -- Mounted on vertical doorframe profiles and central ver-tical profiles on two-leaved doors-- For on-site mounting on the doorframe’s upper cross-beam-- Mounted above and below the EI290 and REI 120 leaves

Hinges -- Nr. 2 three-wing hinges for each leaf-- of which one ball-bearing hinge with screws for vertical adjustment of the leaf, marked as per EN 1935, clas-sified for up to 160 kg load, 200.000 cycles durability, suitable for fire door use-- and one hinge with self-closing spring

Safety bolts -- Nr. 2 safety bolts on hinge side leaf edge

Locking mechanism-- Reversible locking mechanism with bolt and central lock-- marked in conformity with EN 12209 standard-- Insert with patent key, Euro profile cylinder ready

Handle -- Fire rated handle in black PA6 nylon with steel core-- Steel installation plate with cylinder hole-- Backplate in black PA6 nylon-- Fastener screws and patent key insert

NOTECylinder and rebate sealing provided on request only.The handle requires assembly.


8

UN

IVER

fire

do

or INCLUDED ACCESSORIES

which are part of the Univer fire doors:

Closing regulator-- Two-leaved doors include an RC/STD closing regulator to

ensure the correct closing sequence of the leaves-- marking in conformity with EN 1158 standard

Locking mechanism for secondary leaf -- “Flush-bolt” automatic locking of the secondary leaf-- Lever control for unlocking

Upper coupling system for the secondary leaf-- Secondary leaf lock activated device which inserts rod into the upper strike box-- Upper strike box in black PA6 nylon with steel roller

Lower coupling system for the secondary leaf-- Vertical rod with steel point which inserts into lower strike box-- Floor catch (floor-mounted floor catch) made of self-extinguishing black nylon, for doors without threshold-- Floor catch in self-extinguishing black nylon with a steel roller, for doors with threshold

Identification plate -- Metal tag with door identification data, in accordance with current regulations

Finishing -- Standard painted with epoxy-polyester thermoset pow-ders in a 180 degrees oven, orange skin, anti-scratch finishing-- Standard pastel turquoise color, lighter tone for the leaf

(NCS4020-B50G), darker tone for the frame (NCS5020-B50G)

Standard packaging -- Single door wrapped into stretchable polyethylene (PE) film-- Assembled doorframes for one-leaved doors-- Assembly required for doorframes for two-leaved doors-- Palletized on wooden pallets

Door weight kg/m2 of wall openingclass 1 leaf 2 leaves

EI230 34 -

EI260 36 35

REI 60 34 33

EI290, REI 120 43 41

NOTEIf the door ever needs to be repainted, follow the precise instructions on the „painting“ page.The closing regulator requires assembly.


9

UN

IVER

fi re

do

orOPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

A wide variety of accessories and surface fi nishes are available on request for maximum value enhancement of Univer doors to your own specifi c needs.

The proper accessories can help resolve: Safety-related needs -- Doors for panic exits (see panic bars)-- Doors for emergency exits (see emergency exit handles)-- Open doors which must be closed in case of fi re (see leaf holding systems)

Installation and utilization needs-- Frame extensions-- Drip steel-profi le-- Special fastener screws-- Kick and protection plates-- Windows

Access-related control issues-- Electrically-activated lock mechanisms-- Electric handle mechanisms-- Magnetic blocking mechanisms

Performance enhancing-- Sealing-- Cylinders-- Door closers-- Special closing regulators-- Special handles

NOTEDetails on the optional accessories may be found in the following chap-ters of this brochure:- Finishing - Accessories for metal doors- Panic barsRight-opening doors are the default selection if opening direction is not specifi ed.

Customized fi nishing-- Select paint colors from a wide variety of RAL tints-- NDD – Ninz Digital Decor, graphic images applied with

special ink jets and protected by a transparent topcoat. Infi nite varieties of customizable decorations in harmony with specifi c door settings-- Stainless steel handles -- Colored handles

Packaging for maximum protectionSturdy wooden crates protect all doors and related ac-cessories-- NDD decorated doors-- Construction sites-- Shipping abroad-- Special transport

The following optional accessories make Univer doors irreversible, requir-ing the indication of the door opening direction when the order is placed:- SLASH panic bar- Panic bar for secondary leaves- Windows- MAC lock- ELM/cisa and ELM/mt electric handle- Special locks (016 tir- Stel 15)


10

UN

IVER

fire

do

or

Specific optional accessoriesUNIVER Fire doors

WINDOW WITH FIRE RATED GLASS

Upon request all one- and two-leaved fire doors, exclud-ing those EI230 rated, may be equipped with round or rectangular windows with fire rated stratified glass and window frames. Windows not possible for one-leaved REI doors with FM L (wall opening) above 1167mm.

Limits prescribed by standard According to standards UNI 9723 and EN 1634-1, windows may be smaller but not larger than the test sample size, and the reverse holds true for the border strip around the window which may be wider but not thinner.The following limits correspond with these restrictions.

Borders, window position“Border measurement” refers to the distance from the edge of the window to the wall opening of the door.

Elevation for round windowswindow size FM H position

Ø 300 minimum 2050 Y=1600Ø 300 less than 2050 Y=FM H - 450Ø 400 minimum 2150 Y=1600Ø 400 from 2050 to 2149 Y=1550Ø 400 less than 2050 Y=FM H - 500

Elevation for rectangular windowswindow dimensions L x H FM H position

250/300 x 400 minimum 2150 Z=1450250/300 x 400 from 2050 to 2149 Z=1350250/300 x 400 less than 2050 Z=FM H -700

a

b

Y

b

a

Z

Window dimensions

min. border EI2

min. border REI

dimensions FM L min.

a b a b

Ø 300 Ø 400 220 300 220 300 740

840

Ø 300Ø 400 220 300 220 300 L1 740 + L2 min.

L1 840 + L2 min.

Ø 300 Ø 400 220 300 220 300 L1 740 + L2 740

L1 840 + L2 840

250 x 400 300 x 400 250 300 300 300 EI2=750 REI=850

EI2=800 REI=900

250 x 400 300 x 400 300 300 300 300 L1 850 + L2 min.

L1 900 + L2 min.

250 x 400 300 x 400 300 300 300 300 L1 850 + L2 850

L1 900 + L2 900

Round window cross section

54 17

Window ØBorder Border

Rectangular window cross section

1550

Window LxHBorder Border

Window thicknessEI260, REI 60 21 mm EI290 37 mm REI 120 53 mm

NOTE The positions indicated above are standard.Different positions may be considered as long as they respect the mini-mum “a” and “b” border strips. The window itself may not be supplied separately except for replacements. It is always advisable for doors with windows to be equipped with door closers for controlled closing.

ATTENTION REI windows become opaque on exposure to temperatures of 40 de-grees or higher, or when installed outside and exposed to UV radia-tion. Minor aesthetic imperfections or tiny air bubbles do not compro-mise the fire resistance of the glass, and do not constitute grounds for claims. For special instructions and recommendations for fire windows, see the “Notices” reported on the last page of the window accessories section of the present brochure.

11

UN

IVER

fire

do

or

Specific optional accessoriesUNIVER Fire doors

73

Wall opening

Doorframe opening

50

Wall opening

Doorframe opening

FRAME EXTENSIONS FOR UNIVER DOORS

IM 11 - IM 12 Frame extensions to be mounted in addition to the Univer frame acting as a wall cladding. Made of “Sendzimir” proc-essed hot-galvanized sheet metal and painted the same color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Pro-file on three sides, upper corners with 45 degree joint, fixing with screws and plugs (screws and plugs not included). IM 11: for 50mm door thickness, for installation on 70mm (min.) wall thicknessIM 12: for 60mm door thickness, for installation on 80mm (min.) wall thickness

IM 13 - IM 14 Telescopic frame extension to be screwed to the Univer doorframe acting as a wall cladding. Consists of two overlap-ping profiles with a 25mm adjustable range. Made of “Send-zimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal painted the same color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Profile on three sides, upper corners with 90 degree joint.Complete with fastener screws. To mount the frame exten-sion, fixing holes need to be drilled into doorframe on site. Combine with sealing to conceal the screw heads. IM 13: for 50mm door thickness, for installation on 125mm (min.) wall thicknessIM 14: for 60mm door thickness, for installation on 135mm (min.) wall thickness

REBATE SEALING

FF/CR sealing (for EI2 doors) and FF sealing (for REI doors) in black extruded profile to be pressed into the dedicated groove in the perimetral frame.

FF sealing in black extruded profile self-adhesive for ap-plication to the central joint of two-leaved doors.

NOTEUpon request sealing supplied for single doors to be cut and mounted on site.

ENHANCED PERFORMANCE (Sm, C5)

Mandatory accessoriesEnhanced performance features type mandatory optional acc. reference in brochure

EI260-Sm Smoke control Door1 leaf - rubber seal FF/CR

- Nr. 1 automatic door sweepUNIVER fire doorACCESSORIES

2 leaves - rubber seal FF/CR- Nr. 2 automatic door sweep

UNIVER fire door ACCESSORIES

EI260-C5 Durability: 200,000 cycles1 leaf - Nr. 1 door closer ACCESSORIES

2 leaves - Nr. 2 door closers ACCESSORIES

12

UN

IVER

fire

do

or Doors without lower threshold

Vertical cross section

Door

fram

e op

enin

g =

FM H

-40

Wal

l ope

ning

FM

H

Exte

rior d

oorf

ram

e =

FM H

+13

FFL

+15

+5

Doors with internal lower thresholdVertical cross section

Door

fram

e op

enin

g =

FM H

-72

32

Wal

l ope

ning

FM

H

Exte

rior d

oorf

ram

e =

FM H

+13

FFL

+15

+5

NOTE The tolerances FM L

+20+10 , FM H

+15+5 of the indicated measurements

make it easier to fill the gap between the wall and the doorframe with cement mortar.

FFL = Finished floor level

Door cross sections - MeasurementsUNIVER Fire doors

One-leaved doorsHorizontal cross section

Wall opening FM L

Exterior doorframe = FM L +32

Doorframe opening = FM L -74

+20+10

Doors with internal and external lower thresholds Vertical cross section

Door

fram

e op

enin

g=

FM H

-72

Wal

l ope

ning

FM

H

Exte

rior d

oorf

ram

e =

FM H

+34

FFL

+15

+5

Two-leaved doorsHorizontal section

Doorframe opening = FM L - 80

L1L2

Wall opening FM L = L1+ L2


Active leaf opening = L1 -75

+20+10

Leaf thicknessclass thickness

EI230, REI 60 50 mmEI260, EI290, REI 120 60 mm

13

UN

IVER

fire

do

orINSTALLATION WITH ANCHORS FOR MORTAR FIXING

For mortar fixing, appropriate cuts will need to be created in the walls (section 80 x 200 mm). The anchors should be bent and blocked inside the wall. For fire sealing purposes and mechanical hold, the space between the doorframe and the masonry should always be filled with concrete mortar.

INSTALLATION FOR EXPANSION SCREWS FIXING

For the installation with expansion screws, the anchors serve as spacers and should not be bent. Using Würth type art. 0910436112 plugs or similar (supplied at the customer‘s expense), installation requires holes to be drilled through the thermo expansive sealing. The door-frame has pre-drilled holes. For fire sealing purposes and mechanical hold, the space between the doorframe and the masonry should always be filled with concrete mortar.

ANCHOR POSITIONING

One-leaved doorsRight opening Left opening

-----

Two-leaved doorsRight opening

Left opening

NOTEProper installation requires 80 x 200 mm holes to be dug into the masonry.

Installation methodsUNIVER Fire doors

14

UN

IVER

fire

do

or

Order measurementsUNIVER Fire doors

ORDER MEASUREMENTS

Wall opening Doorframe opening

----- -

One-leaved EI230, EI260, EI290 doorsFM L x FM H PT L x PT Hstandard dimensions doorframe opening

800 x 2050 / 2150 726 x 2010 / 2110900 x 2050 / 2150 826 x 2010 / 21101000 x 2050 / 2150 926 x 2010 / 21101100 x 2050 / 2150 1026 x 2010 / 2110

semi-standard dimensionsfrom 540 to 1150 x 2050 / 2150 from 466

to 1076 x 2010 / 2110

non-standard dimensionsfrom 540 to 1150 x from 1780

to 2150from 466 to 1076 x from 1740

to 2110

Two-leaved EI260, EI290 doorsFM L (L1+L2) x FM H PT L x PT Hstandard dimensions doorframe opening

1200 ( 600 + 600) x 2050 / 2150 1120 x 2010 / 21101200 ( 700 + 500) x 2050 / 2150 1120 x 2010 / 21101300 ( 650 + 650) x 2050 / 2150 1220 x 2010 / 21101300 ( 800 + 500) x 2050 / 2150 1220 x 2010 / 21101400 ( 700 + 700) x 2050 / 2150 1320 x 2010 / 21101400 ( 900 + 500) x 2050 / 2150 1320 x 2010 / 21101500 ( 750 + 750) x 2050 / 2150 1420 x 2010 / 21101600 ( 800 + 800) x 2050 / 2150 1520 x 2010 / 21101700 ( 900 + 800) x 2050 / 2150 1620 x 2010 / 21101800 ( 900 + 900) x 2050 / 2150 1720 x 2010 / 21101900 (1000 + 900) x 2050 / 2150 1820 x 2010 / 21102000 (1000 +1000) x 2050 / 2150 1920 x 2010 / 2110

semi-standard dimensionsfrom 1000 (500+500) to 2000 (1000+1000) x 2050 / 2150 from 920

to 1920 x 2010 / 2110

non-standard dimensionsfrom 1000 (500+500) to 2000 (1000+1000) x from 1780

to 2150from 920 to 1920 x from 1740

to 2110

One-leaved doorsPT L = FM L - 74PT H = FM H - 40

Two-leaved doorsPT L = FM L - 80PT H = FM H - 40

NOTE Buyers should be aware that pursuant to and in accordance with Leg-islative Decree dd. 19.09.1994 Nr. 626, resp. of Legislative Decree dd. 19.03.1996 Nr. 242, all doors used for emergency exits must have a minimum height of 2000 mm (= nominal wall opening 2040 mm). Unless specified otherwise by the customer, two-leaved standard, semi-standard and customized doors are supplied with a right-pull opening direction.

One-leaved REI 60, REI 120 doorsFM L x FM H PT L x PT Hstandard dimensions doorframe opening

800 x 2050 / 2150 726 x 2010 / 2110900 x 2050 / 2150 826 x 2010 / 21101000 x 2050 / 2150 926 x 2010 / 21101100 x 2050 / 2150 1026 x 2010 / 21101200 x 2050 / 2150 1126 x 2010 / 21101350 x 2050 / 2150 1276 x 2010 / 2110

semi-standard dimensionsfrom 540 to 1345 x 2050 / 2150 from 466

to 1271 x 2010 / 2110

non-standard dimensionsfrom 540 to 1330 x from 1780

to 2150from 466 to 1256 x from 1740

to 2110from 1331 to 1350 x from 1938

to 2150from 1257 to 1276 x from 1898

to 2110

Two-leaved REI 60, REI 120 doorsFM L (L1+L2) x FM H PT L x PT Hstandard dimensions doorframe opening

1150 ( 750 + 400 ) x 2050 / 2150 1070 x 2010 / 21101200 ( 800 + 400 ) x 2050 / 2150 1120 x 2010 / 21101250 ( 800 + 450 ) x 2050 / 2150 1170 x 2010 / 21101300 ( 900 + 400 ) x 2050 / 2150 1220 x 2010 / 21101350 ( 900 + 450 ) x 2050 / 2150 1270 x 2010 / 21101400 (1000 + 400 ) x 2050 / 2150 1320 x 2010 / 21101450 (1000 + 450 ) x 2050 / 2150 1370 x 2010 / 21101600 ( 800 + 800 ) x 2050 / 2150 1520 x 2010 / 21101700 ( 900 + 800 ) x 2050 / 2150 1620 x 2010 / 21101800 ( 900 + 900 ) x 2050 / 2150 1720 x 2010 / 21101900 (1000 + 900) x 2050 / 2150 1820 x 2010 / 21102000 (1000 +1000) x 2050 / 2150 1920 x 2010 / 2110

semi-standard dimensionsfrom 940 (540+400) to 2000 (1000+1000) x 2050 / 2150 from 860

to 1920 x 2010 / 2110

non-standard dimensionsfrom 940 (540+400) to 2000 (1000+1000) x from 1780

to 2150from 860 to 1920 x from 1740

to 2110

15

UN

IVER

fire

do

or

Opening measurements - EncumbrancesUNIVER Fire doors

OPENING MEASUREMENT AND ENCUMBRANCE WITH 90 DEGREE OPENING

One-leaved doors with panic bar

Net passage calculation EI230 - REI 60 REI 60 EI260 - EI290 - REI 120 EI260 - EI290 - REI 120

panic bar type protrusion one-leaved doors two-leaved doors one-leaved doors two-leaved doors

EXUS 125 FML - 226 FML - 384 FML - 236 FML - 404TWIST 100 FML - 201 FML - 334 FML - 211 FML - 354SLASH 75 FML - 176 FML - 284 FML - 186 FML - 304TOUCHBAR 74 FML - 175 FML - 282 FML - 185 FML - 302z = leaf protrusion relative to the wall FML + 29 L1 + 35

L2 + 64FML + 29 L1 + 35

L2 + 64

ENCUMBRANCE WITH 180 DEGREE OPENING - HANDLE HEIGHT

One-leaved doorsx = FML + 5 h handle = FMH/2 + 50

NOTEThe 90 or 180 degree opening of the leaf could be compromised if handle or door closer protrusions come into contact with the wall.

UNIVER - GENERAL NOTESAll rights reserved.No reproduction (partial or total) without prior authorization by Ninz.Ninz reserves the right to modify the product.

Two-leaved doors with panic bars

Two-leaved doorsx = L1 + 5 y = L2 + 35h handle = FMH/2 + 50 b = 130 (only in the presence of panic bars or M14 handles)

Installation should be executed by qualified technicians.Modifications may only be made as indicated in the installation instruc-tions. Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.

“fire protection excellence, flexibility custom-made“

All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced technical changes to the contents of this brochure. Fire-rated closures are typically used for internal compartmentalization and have been designed for this purpose.

PROGET NINZ DoorsFIRE RATED VERSION

FEATURES 18 - 21




OPTIONAL INSTALLATION METHODS 28

DRY WALL INSTALLATION 29 - 30

ORDER MEASUREMENTS - HANDLE HEIGHTS 31 - 32


18

PRO

GET

fi

re d

oo

rs

One-leaved doors available in the following classes:

REI 60 REI 90REI 30 REI 60 REI 90REI 30

Two-leaved doors available in the following classes:

REI 60 REI 90REI 30 REI 60 REI 90REI 30

NOTEThe colors represented in the photos are not standard.Door closer provided upon request only.

FeaturesPROGET Fire doors

THE FIRE DOOR IN A CLASS OF ITS OWN

“Indisputable quality”-- Especially sturdy door for safe functioning over time-- Ideal for application to uneven or weak walls-- Fully isolated frame for true “dry wall installation”-- Built to order for all kinds of requests-- Fully galvanized door, including the “hidden” parts-- Made of hot-galvanized sheet metal, “Sendzimir” proc-essed-- Corrosion protection also provided along cut edges of the metal sheets-- Painted with epoxy-polyester thermoset powders in a 180 degrees (Celsius) oven-- Substantial paint layer (70 microns plus)-- Optimal corrosion resistance demonstrated by 500 hour salt-fog test-- Unaffected by severe climate changes, demonstrated by 2000 hours with +60° to -10° cycles at 75% humidity-- Finishing with high-quality aesthetics-- Orange skin anti-scratch structured paint-- Customizable with wide selection of RAL colors

-- “Practicality of use”-- Truly sturdy frame that facilitates anchoring to the wall -- Suitable for all wall types-- Different installation methods to choose from-- Significantly reduced installation times-- Type approvals for multiple installations to different wall types-- Ample size range-- Wide variety of accessories

“Conformity to standards”-- In-house Ninz R&D with specialized testing equipment-- Fire testing in accordance with UNI 9723 and EN 1634-1-- Mechanical testing for the marking of accessories-- marked door accessories studied and sized to meet standard European requirements-- Careful selection of materials and manufacturing methods-- Strict product testing for conformity to declared techni-cal standards-- Absolute functional certainty over time-- Doors “type approved” in compliance with M.D. 21 June 2004-- Products delivered with the documentation required by current regulations


Opening directionOpening direction needs to be indicated while ordering



19

PRO

GET

fi

re d

oo

rs

STANDARD ELEMENTS

which comprise Proget fire doors:

Door leaf-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal, press folded and electro welded-- Perimetral rebate on 3 sides, flat at the bottom-- Internally reinforced with hot-galvanized steel profiles-- Heat-insulated treated mineral wool packing that is rig-idly joined to the sheet metal-- Internal stiffeners for overhead door closer and panic bar-- Single thickness of 60 mm

Standard frame-- Sturdy profile with a sizeable cross section-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal-- Equipped with special assembly brackets-- Grooves for thermo expansive sealing and rebate sealing-- Standard installation via anchors for mortar fixing-- Upon request installation via expansion screws or screws onto the subframe-- Lower spacer, mounting template-- Rests on finished flooring without rebate-- Strike plates in PA6 black nylon for lock bolt and safety bolts-- Assembly required for doorframes

Thermo expansive sealing-- Mounted on vertical doorframe profiles and central ver-tical profiles (for two-leaved doors)-- Mounted above and below the leaves depending on the certification


Hinges-- Nr. 2 three-wing hinges for each leaf-- of which one ball-bearing hinge with screws for vertical

adjustment of the leaf, marked as per EN 1935, classi-fied for up to 160 kg load, 200.000 cycles durability, suit-able for fire door use-- and one hinge with self-closing spring

Safety bolts- Nr. 1 or 2 safety bolts applied on hinge side leaf edge

Locking mechanism-- Reversible locking mechanism with bolt and central latch-- marked in conformity with EN 12209 standard-- Insert with patent key, Euro profile cylinder ready

Handle- Fire rated handle in black PA6 nylon with steel core- Steel installation plate with cylinder hole- Backplate in black PA6 nylon- Fastener screws and patent key insert


20

PRO

GET

fi

re d

oo

rs

INCLUDED ACCESSORIES


Closing regulator-- Standard two-leaved doors include an RC/STD Closing regulator to ensure the correct closing sequence of the leaves-- marking in conformity with EN 1158 standard

Locking mechanism for secondary leaf-- “Flush-bolt” automatic locking of the secondary leaf-- Lever control for unlocking

Upper coupling system for the secondary leaf-- Secondary leaf lock activated device which inserts rod into the upper strike box-- Upper strike box in pierced steel with steel roller

Lower coupling system for the secondary leaf -- Vertical rod with steel point which inserts into lower strike box-- Lower floor catch (floor-mounted bushing) made of self-extinguishing black nylon with rebate stopper

Identification plate-- Metal tag with door identification data, in accordance with current regulations

NOTEIf the door ever needs to be repainted, follow the precise instructions on the “painting” page.

Finishing-- Standard painted with epoxy-polyester thermoset pow-ders in a 180 degrees oven, orange skin, anti-scratch finishing-- Standard pastel turquoise color, lighter tone for the leaf (NCS4020-B50G), darker tone for the frame (NCS5020-B50G)

Standard packaging-- Single leaf wrapped into stretchable polyethylene (PE) film-- Single packaging for each doorframe with stretchable polyethylene (PE) film-- Palletized on wooden pallets

Door weight class kg/m2 of wall opening1 leaf REI 60 372 leaves REI 60 351 leaf REI 120 422 leaves REI 120 40


21

PRO

GET

fi

re d

oo

rs

INSTALLATION ONTO OTHER WALL TYPES

Other types of installation are possible, all of which have been rigorously certifi ed and approved-- Frame for dry wall installation with expansion screws-- Frame for dry wall installation with screws onto the subframe-- Frame for installation on plasterboard-- Embracing frame for plasterboard installation

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

A wide variety of accessories and surface fi nishes are available on request for maximum value enhancement of Proget doors to your own specifi c needs. The proper accessories can help resolve:

Safety-related needs-- Doors for panic exits (see panic bars)-- Doors for emergency exits (see emergency exit handles)-- Open doors which must be closed in case of fi re (see leaf holding systems)

Installation and utilization needs-- Frame extensions-- Floor mounted fl oor catch in galvanized steel-- Drip steel-profi le-- Special fastener screws-- Kick and protection plates-- Rectangular windows, standard dimensions or built to order-- Round windows


Performance enhancing-- Sealing-- Cylinders-- Door closers-- Special closing regulators-- Special handles

Customized fi nishing-- Select paint colors from a wide variety of RAL tints-- NDD – Ninz Digital Decor, graphic images applied with special ink jets and protected by a transparent topcoat. Infi nite varieties of customizable decorations in harmo-ny with specifi c door settings-- Stainless steel handles -- Colored handles

Packaging for maximum protectionSturdy wooden crates protect all doors and related acces-sories-- NDD decorated doors-- Construction sites-- Shipping abroad-- Special transport

NOTEDetails on the optional accessories may be found in the following chap-ters of this brochure:- Finishing - Accessories for metal doors- Panic bars


22

PRO

GET

fi

re d

oo

rs

Specific optional accessoriesPROGET Fire doors

WINDOW WITH FIRE RATED GLASS

Upon request all one- and two-leaved fire doors REI 60 and REI 120 may be equipped with round or rectangu-lar windows with fire rated stratified glass and window frames.

Limits prescribed by regulationsAccording to standards UNI 9723 and EN 1634-1, windows may be smaller but not larger than the test sample size, and the reverse holds true for the border strip around the window which may be wider but not thinner.The following limits correspond with these restrictions.

Borders, window position“Border measurement“ refers to the distance from the edge of the window to the wall opening of the door.


Ø 300 minimum 2050 Y=1600

Ø 300 less than 2050 Y=FM H - 450

Ø 400 minimum 2150 Y=1600

Ø 400 from 2050 to 2149 Y=1550

Ø 400 less than 2050 Y=FM H - 500


300 x 400 minimum 2150 Z=1450

300 x 400 from 2050 to 2149 Z=1350

300 x 400 less than 2050 Z=FM H -700

400 x 600 minimum 2150 Z=1250

400 x 600 from 2050 to 2149 Z=1150

400 x 600 less than 2050 Z=FM H - 900

400 x 1200 minimum 2150 Z=650

400 x 1200 from 2050 to 2149 Z=550

400 x 1200 less than 2050 Z=FM H - 1500

a

b

Y

b

a

Z

NOTEPosition and measurements indicated above are for standard.Different positions and measurements may be considered as long as they respect the minimum “a” and “b” border strips and maximal measurements mentioned in the certificate for the window. The win-dow itself may not be supplied separately except for replacements. It is always advisable for doors with windows to be equipped with door closers for controlled closing.


54

Window Ø

17

BorderBorder


15

Window LxH Border

50

Border

Window thicknessclass glass thickness

REI 60 21 mmREI 120 53 mm

ATTENTIONREI windows become opaque on exposure to temperatures of 40 de-grees or higher, or when installed outside and exposed to UV radia-tion. Minor aesthetic imperfections or tiny air bubbles do not compro-mise the fire resistance of the glass, and do not constitute grounds for claims. For special instructions and recommendations for fire windows, see the „Notices“ reported on the last page of the window accessories section of the present brochure.

23

PRO

GET

fi

re d

oo

rs


WINDOW SPECIFICATIONS BASED ON INSTALLATION METHOD

mortar

fixing

subfr

ame

expan

sion s

crews

plaste

rboard

plaste

rboard

with em

bracin

g fram

e

REI60

REI12

0

dimensions FM L (L1 + L2) x FM Hmodel min./max. window border stripL x H a b

Ø 300 300

300

from 900 to 1170 x from 1775 to 2275from 1004 to 1340 x from 2050 to 2500

Ø 400 300 from 1000 to 1170 x from 1775 to 2275from 1004 to 1340 x from 2050 to 2500

from 250 to 400

from 250 to 600

250 from 750 to 900 x from 1775 to 2000

from 250 to 400

from 250 to 600

300 from 850 to 1000 x from 1775 to 2150

from 250 to 400

from 250 to 600

300 from 850 to 1007 x from 1775 to 2150from 864 to 1153 x from 1938 to 2363

(*)

from 250 to 400

from 630 to 1400


from 250 to 620

from 250 to 400

360 from 970 to 1340 x from 1775 to 2670

from 250to 564

from 250 to 443


(*)

from 250to 522

from 500 to 1460


Ø 300 300

from 1800 (900 + 900) to 2252 (1126 + 1126) x from 1775 to 2275**from 1962 (996 + 996) to 2540 (1270 + 1270) x from 2050 to 2500**

Ø 400 300


from 250to 400

from 250 to 600

300 from 1700 (850 + 850) to 2000 (1000 + 1000) x from 1775 to 2150**

from 250to 400

from 250to 600

300

from 1700 (850 + 850) to 2000 (1000 + 1000) x from 1775 to 2150**from 1708 (856 + 852) to 2229 (1144 +1148) x from 1938 to 2363**

(*)

from 250to 400

from 630to 1400

250

from 1100 (750 + 350) to 1800 ( 900 + 900 ) x from 1775 to 2000from 1539 (772 + 767) to 2061 (1028 +1033) x from 1803 to 2197

from 250to 620

from 250to 400

325 from 1800 (900 + 900) to 2540 (1270 + 1270) x from 1775 to 2670**

from 250to 564

from 250 to 443

300


(*)

from 250to 515

from 500 to 1460

320

from 1240 (890 + 350) to 2315 (1155 + 1160) x from 1775 to 2620from 1975 (989 + 986) to 2540 (1268 + 1272) x from 2361 to 2670

NOTE(*) Windows only possible for the minimum size of 0,25 m2, and only on one-leaved doors or the active leaf of two-leaved doors.(**) FM secondary leaf minimum without window with RC/STD = 350 mmFM secondary leaf minimum without window but with RC2 = 370 mm

24

PRO

GET

fi

re d

oo

rs


FRAME EXTENSIONS FOR PROGET DOORS

IM 1Frame extensions to be mounted in addition to the Proget frame to serve as embracing frame made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal and painted the same color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Pro-file on three sides, upper corners with 45 degree joint, fix-ing with screws and plugs in groove (screws and plugs not included).

IM 3Frame extensions to be mounted in addition to the Proget frame to serve as embracing frame, especially for plaster-board. Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal and painted the same color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Profile on three sides, up-per corners with 45 degree joint, fixing with screws and plugs (screws and plugs not included).

IM 4Frame extension to be screwed to the Proget doorframe acting as a wall cladding. Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal painted the same color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Profile on three sides, upper corners with 90 degree joint.Complete with fastener screws. To mount the frame ex-tension, fixing holes need to be drilled into doorframe on site. Combine with sealing to conceal the screw heads.

IM 5Telescopic frame extension to be screwed to the Proget doorframe acting as a wall cladding for expansion screw fixing. Consists of two overlapping profiles with a 25mm adjustable range. Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal painted the same color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Profile on three sides, upper corners with 90 degree joint.Complete with fastener screws. To mount the frame ex-tension pre-drilled holes are available on the frame. Com-bine with sealing to conceal the screw heads.

Doorframeopening -3mm on each side

73

Wall opening

73

Wall opening


73

Wall opening


73

Wall opening


25

PRO

GET

fi

re d

oo

rs


STEEL FLOOR CATCH

Floor-mounted steel floor catch for two-leaved Proget doors. Made of pierced and successively galvanized steel. Includes rebate stop for the passive leaf, the strike box for insertion of the rod, Nr. 3 screws and Nr. 3 plugs.To be used in place of the nylon floor catch for doors that usually remain open and where carts and heavy equip-ment pass on a regular basis.

FF REBATE SEALING

FF sealing in black extruded profile to be pressed into the dedicated groove in the perimetral frame and on the cen-tral joint of two-leaved doors.

NOTEUpon request sealing supplied for single one-leaved or two-leaved doors to be cut and mounted on site.

Lower PROGET steel floor catch

1450

3551

26

18

22

26

PRO

GET

fi

re d

oo

rs

Doors without lower threshold Vertical cross section

Door

fram

e op

enin

g=

FM

H -4

0

Wal

l ope

ning

FM

H

Exte

rior d

oorfr

ame

= F

M H

+30

FFL

+15

+5

Door cross sections - MeasurementsPROGET Fire doors


Exterior doorframe = FM L + 60


Wall opening FM L +20+10

Two-leaved doorsHorizontal cross section




Wall opening FM L = L1 + L2+20+10

L1L2

Leaf thicknessREI 60, REI 120 60 mm


+20+10 , FM H


make it easier to fill the gap between the wall and the doorframe with cement mortar.For dry wall installation, the holes must be precise and greater toleran-ce ranges should not be employed.


27

PRO

GET

fi

re d

oo

rs

FM L greater than 1035 and/or FM H greater than 2200

-----


Standard installation methodsPROGET Fire doors

INSTALLATION WITH ANCHORS FOR MORTAR FIXING

The standard installation method for Proget doors is to use the anchors for mortar fixing. Appropriate cuts will need to be created in the walls (section 80 x 200 mm). The anchors should be bent and blocked inside the wall. For fire sealing purposes and mechanical hold, the space between the doorframe and the masonry should always be filled with concrete mortar.

One-leaved doorsFM L = from 500 to 1035 x FM H = from 1775 to 2200

Two-leaved doorsFM L = from 850 to 2070 x FM H = from 1775 to 2200

NOTEFor proper installation, the cuts for the anchors should be 80 x 200 mm in size.

28

PRO

GET

fi

re d

oo

rs

Doorframe opening

Wall opening

Doorframe opening

Wall opening

Optional installation methodsPROGET Fire doors

DRY WALL INSTALLATION ONTO THE SUBFRAME WITH SCREWS

Installation method certifi ed for one- or two-leaved REI 60 and REI 120 doors, in conformity with UNI 9723 standard, for screw fi xing onto metal subframes in the walls.

The subframe is made of hollow steel profi les, cross section 30 x 15 mm, complete with spacers and anchors for mortar fi xing. Subframes need to be ordered separately from the door. Make sure measurements correspond to the door’s FM L x FM H measurements.

The supplied subframe comes factory heat-insulated with special materials and includes corner joints and a lower spacer to be added on site.

The subframe method allows a dry wall” installation of the doors, making an installation onto fi nished masonry possible.


Installation method certifi ed for one- or two-leaved REI 60 and REI 120 doors, in conformity with UNI 9723 stand-ard, for expansion screws. Designed for installations onto concrete, full bricks, half-full bricks, lightened cement and other materials.

The supplied subframe comes factory heat-insulated with special materials and includes corner joints and a lower spacer to be added on site. This method allows for “dry wall” installation of the doors without requiring any additional masonry work. Installa-tion of the door, therefore, becomes a simple mechanical operation plus the fi nal adjustments.

NOTEPlease specify clearly whether the door is for subframe installation or for direct wall installation with expansion screws.

WALL SCREWS

For direct wall installations or installation onto subframes, special expansion screws should be used without plugs. Please see the “door accessories” pages for more details.

29

PRO

GET

fi

re d

oo

rs

Construction of the plasterboard should be done following the specific door installation instructions.

Plasterboard walls REI 60Made using galvanized steel frames with “U”-shaped 75 x 40 mm guide profi les, “C”-shaped 75 x 47 mm vertical pro-fi les (doubled next to the doorframe), with a single layer of 12,5 mm thick fi re rated plasterboard used as fi nishing on both sides and on the profi les around the doorframe.

Order measurement

Required wall opening

Doorframe opening

Exterior of doorframe

FM L (width) FM L - 25 mm FM L - 80 mm FM L + 60 mmFM H (height) FM H - 12 mm FM H - 40 mm FM H + 30 mm

Plasterboard walls REI 120Made using galvanized steel framing with “U”-shaped 75 x 40 mm guide profi les, “C”-shaped 75 x 47 mm vertical pro-fi les (doubled next to the doorframe), with a double layer of 12,5 mm thick fi re rated plasterboard used as fi nishing on both sides and on the profi les around the doorframe.

Order measurement


Doorframe opening


FM L (width) FM L - 25 mm FM L - 80 mm FM L + 60 mmFM H (height) FM H - 12 mm FM H - 40 mm FM H + 30 mm

INSTALLATION ONTO PLASTERBOARD WITH EM-BRACING FRAME

Installation method onto plasterboard certifi ed for one- or two-leaved REI 60 and REI 120 doors in conformity with UNI 9723 standard.The supplied frame comes factory heat-insulated with special materials and includes corner joints and pre-drilled screw holes with cover caps.

Door cross section and plasterboard version:

REI 60 REI 90REI 30

Opening to be created

min

. 100

Doorframe opening

Order measurement FM L x H



REI 60 REI 90REI 30

min

. 125

Opening to be created

Doorframe opening



Installation onto plasterboardPROGET Fire doors

30

PRO

GET

fi

re d

oo

rs

Construction of the plasterboard should be done following the specific door installation instructions.

Plasterboard walls REI 60Made with 100 mm metal framing, with a reduction to 75 mm next to the door and with uprights reinforced in-ternally with an additional “C” profi le. Finishing of both faces with 15 mm thick fi re rated plasterboard layers and with an additional 12,5 mm plasterboard layer internally around the door on the two sides.

Order measurement


Doorframe opening


FM L (width) FM L + 6 mm FM L - 80 mm FM L + 60 mmFM H (height) FM H + 3 mm FM H - 40 mm FM H + 30 mm

Plasterboard walls REI 120The support structure adjacent to the door consists of two uprights and a 75 x 50 x 4 mm plate cross beam, 4 telescopic sleeves inserted in the uprights for anchoring to the ceiling and fl oor, 2 joints with sleeves installation of the crossbeam. 100 mm metal framing and 75 mm next to the door. The 75 mm framing is fi lled with mineral wool. A double-layer of 12,5 mm fi re rated plasterboard layers as fi nishing for the two faces of the metal framing and the support structure, with a triple-layer in the door area.

Order measurement


Doorframe opening


FM L (width) FM L + 6 mm FM L - 80 mm FM L + 60 mmFM H (height) FM H + 3 mm FM H - 40 mm FM H + 30 mm

Installation onto plasterboardPROGET Fire doors

INSTALLATION ONTO PLASTERBOARD WITH AN-GULAR FRAME

Installation method certifi ed for one- or two-leaved REI 60 and REI 120 doors, in conformity with UNI 9723 standard, onto plasterboard.The supplied frame comes factory heat-insulated with special materials and includes corner joints, a lower spacer to be added on site. and pre-drilled screw holes on the rebate.


REI 60 REI 90REI 30

min.200

min

.130Doorframe opening




REI 60 REI 90REI 30

min.200

min

.150Doorframe opening



31

PRO

GET

fi

re d

oo

rs

Order measurementsPROGET Fire doors

ORDER MEASUREMENTS

Wall Opening Doorframe opening

-----

One-leaved door FM L x FM HPT L x PT H

standard dimensions REI 60 and 120 doorframe opening

800 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 720 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110

900 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 820 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110

1000 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 920 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110

1100 x 2050 / 2150 1020 x 2010 / 2110

1200 x 2050 / 2150 1120 x 2010 / 2110

1300 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1220 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110

1340 x 2050 / 2150 1260 x 2010 / 2110

semi-standard dimensions REI 60 and 120

from 546 to 995 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 from 466 to 915

x 1960 / 2010 / 2110

non-standard dimensions REI 60 and 120from 546 to 1340 x from 1775 to 2670 anchor fixing with mortarfrom 600 to 1170 x from 1775 to 2275 plasterboard installation with embracing framefrom 1004 to 1340 x from 2050 to 2500 plasterboard installation with embracing framefrom 546 to 1007 x from 1775 to 2150 plasterboard installationfrom 864 to 1153 x from 1938 to 2363 plasterboard installationfrom 600 to 1170 x from 1775 to 2275 ready for screw installation onto the subframe or with expansion screws from 1004 to 1340 x from 2050 to 2500 ready for screw installation onto the subframe or with expansion screws

Plasterboard wall opening

-----

One -or two- leaved doors with embracing frame

FPCL = FML - 25FPCH = FMH - 12

One- or two-leaved doorswith angular frame

FPCL = FML + 6FPCH = FMH + 3

NOTEFor embracing frames, the wall openings to be created in the plaster-board walls do not correspond to the order measurement and therefo-re should follow the above specifications.

32

PRO

GET

fi

re d

oo

rs

Order measurements - Handle heightPROGET Fire doors

Two-leaved doors FM L x FM H PT L x PT Hstandard dimensions REI 60 and 120 doorframe opening1150 ( 800 + 350 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1070 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101200 ( 800 + 400 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1120 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101250 ( 800 + 450 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1170 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101250 ( 900 + 350 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1170 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101300 ( 900 + 400 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1220 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101350 ( 900 + 450 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1270 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101350 (1000 + 350 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1270 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101400 (1000 + 400 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1320 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101450 (1000 + 450 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1370 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101600 ( 800 + 800 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1520 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101700 ( 900 + 800 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1620 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101800 ( 900 + 900 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1720 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101800 (1000 + 800 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1720 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101900 (1000 + 900 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1820 x 1960 / 2010 / 21102000 (1000 + 1000) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1920 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110

semi-standard dimensions REI 60 and REI 120from 890 (540+ 350) to 2000 (1000 + 1000) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150

non-standard dimensions REI 60 and 120

from 890 (540 + 350) to 2540 (1270 + 1270) x from 1775 to 2670 anchor fixing with mortar

from 890 (540 + 350) to 2252 (1126 + 1126) x from 1775 to 2275 plasterboard installation with embracing frame

from 1962 (996 + 996) to 2540 (1270 + 1270) x from 2050 to 2500 plasterboard installation with embracing frame

from 890 (540 + 350) to 2000 (1000 + 1000) x from 1775 to 2150 plasterboard installation

from 1708 (856 + 852) to 2292 (1144 + 1148) x from 1938 to 2363 plasterboard installation

from 890 (540 + 350) to 2252 (1126 + 1126) x from 1775 to 2275 ready for screw installation onto the subframe or with expansion screws

from 1962 (996 + 996) to 2540 (1270 + 1270) x from 2050 to 2500 ready for screw installation onto the subframe or with expansion screws

NOTEThe following REI 120 doors with standard measurements are equip-ped with a CP1 door closer: 1 leaf: from 1141 to 1340 x from 2381 to 2630 from 891 to 1140 x from 2631 to 2670 from 1141 to 1340 x from 2631 to 26702 leaves: from 2261 to 2540 x from 2131 to 2380 from 1761 to 2260 x from 2381 to 2630 from 2261 to 2540 x from 2381 to 2630 from 1761 to 2260 x from 2631 to 2670 from 2261 to 2540 x from 2631 to 2670

HANDLE HEIGHT

One-leaved doorh = 1050

----

Buyers should be aware that pursuant to and in accordance with Legislative Decree dd. 19.09.1994 Nr. 626, resp. of Legislative Decree dd. 19.03.1996 Nr. 242, all doors used for emergency exits must have a minimum height of 2000 mm (= nominal wall opening 2040 mm).

Two-leaved doorh = 1050

33

PRO

GET

fi

re d

oo

rs


Two-leaved doorx = L1 + 1 y = L2 + 42b = max. 130 (only in the presence of a panic bar or M14 handle)

Installation should be executed by qualified technicians.Modifications may only be made as indicated in the installation instruc-tions. Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.

OPENING MEASUREMENT AND ENCUMBRANCE WITH 90 DEGREE OPENING


-----

NOTEHandles and door closers may obstruct full 90° or 180° opening.

Net passage calculationpanic bar type protrusion one-leaved door two-leaved doorEXUS 125 FML - 245 FML - 410TWIST 100 FML - 220 FML - 360SLASH 75 FML - 195 FML - 310TOUCHBAR 74 FML - 194 FML - 308z = leaf protrusion relative to the wall FML + 27 L1 + 35, L2+75


One-leaved doorx = FML - 7

NOTEThe 90 or 180 degree opening of the leaf could be compromised if han-dle or door closer protrusions come into contact with the wall.

PROGET - GENERAL NOTESAll rights reserved.No reproduction (partial or total) without prior authorization by Ninz.Ninz reserves the right to modify the product.

Opening measurements - EncumbrancesPROGET fire doors

“bare minimum, maximum performance!”

NINZ REVER multipurpose doors

FEATURES 36 - 39






All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced technical changes to the contents of this brochure. Closures are typically used for internal compartmentalization and have been designed for this purpose.

36

rev

er

mu

ltip

urp

ose

One-leaved doors

Two-leaved doors


Features REVER multipurpose doors

THe eCONOMICAL MULTIPUrPOSe YOU ALWAYS WISHeD FOr

“Quality first”-- Fully galvanized, including the “hidden” parts-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal-- Corrosion protection also provided along the cut edges of the metal-- Painted with epoxy-polyester thermoset powders in a 180 degree (Celsius) oven-- Extra-thick paint layer (over 70 microns)-- Optimal corrosion resistance as demonstrated by 500 hour salt-fog testing-- Finishing with high-quality aesthetics-- Orange skin anti-scratch structured paint-- Customizable with wide selection of RAL colors

“Practicality of use”-- Door reversibility*-- Indication of door opening direction not necessary-- Reduction of stock for retailers-- Simplifies choices for end customers-- Especially well-suited for indoor use-- Light but still sturdy-- Easy installation

“Versatility”-- Very wide field of application-- Can be combined with various frame types-- Installable onto any wall type-- Application with a block frame-- Can be combined with over-head frame panel with or without ventilating perforation-- Available with upper/lower crack enlargement -- Vast assortment of accessories -- Customized measurements also available





37

rev

er

mu

ltip

urp

oseSTANDArD eLeMeNTS

which comprise Rever multipurpose doors:

Door-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal, press folded-- Perimetral rebate on 4 sides-- Internal corrugated honeycomb fiber structure fixed firmly to the sheet metal -- Thickness of 40 mm

Doorframe-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal-- Grooves for rebate sealing-- Suitable for anchors for mortar fixing or expansion screws-- Detachable rebate for application on finished flooring-- Removable threshold for thresholdless installation-- Strike plates in PA6 black nylon for lock bolt-- Assembled doorframes for one-leaved doors-- Assembly required for two-leaved doorframes

Hinges-- Nr. 2 three-wing hinges for each leaf

Locking mechanism-- Reversible locking mechanism with bolt and central latch-- Insert with patent key, Euro profile cylinder ready

Handle-- PA6 black nylon handle-- Fastener screws to pass-- Insert for patent-type key

Safety bolts-- Nr. 3 safety bolts applied on hinge side doorframe edge


Features REVER multipurpose doors

38

rev

er

mu

ltip

urp

ose INCLUDeD ACCeSSOrIeS

which comprise Rever multipurpose doors:

Safety lock-- Central latch for blocking and unblocking the passive leaf-- Lever control for unlocking vertical rods

Upper coupling system for the secondary leaf-- Vertical rod with steel point which inserts into the upper strike box-- Upper strike box in black PA6 nylon with steel roller

Lower coupling system for the secondary leaf-- Vertical rod with steel point which inserts into lower strike box-- Floor catch (floor-mounted bushing) in black nylon, for doors without threshold-- Floor catch in black nylon with a steel roller, for doors with threshold

Finishing-- Standard painted with epoxy-polyester thermoset pow-ders in a 180 degrees oven, orange skin, anti-scratch finishing-- Standard pastel turquoise color, lighter tone for the leaf (NCS4020-B50G), darker tone for the frame (NCS5020-B50G)

Standard packaging-- Single door wrapped into stretchable polyethylene (PE) film-- Assembled doorframes for one-leaved doors-- Assembly required for doorframes for two-leaved doors-- Palletized on wooden pallets

Pre-settings-- Each door is ready for the installation of a three-point SECUR lock-- The main lock and upper rod housing on the secondary leaf are ready for installation of the latching mechanism for panic bars

Door weight kg/m2 of wall opening

1 leaf 15

2 leaves 14


FeaturesREVER multipurpose doors

39

rev

er

mu

ltip

urp

oseOPTIONAL ACCeSSOrIeS

A wide variety of accessories and surface fi nishes are avail-able on request for maximum value enhancement of Rever doors to your own specifi c needs.

The proper accessories can help resolve:

Safety-related needs-- Doors for panic exits (see panic bars)-- Doors for emergency exits (see emergency exit handles)-- Three-point Rever SECUR lock

Installation and utilization needs-- Embracing or telescopic frames-- Frame extensions-- Drip steel-profi le-- Kick and protection plates-- Windows-- Ventilating perforation-- Overhead frame panel-- Available with upper/lower crack enlargement


Performance enhancing-- Rebate sealings-- Cylinders-- Door closers-- Special handles

NOTEDetails about optional accessories may be found in the following chap-ters of this brochure:- Finishing - Accessories for metal doors- Panic barsRight-opening doors are the default selection if opening direction is not specifi ed.

Customized fi nishing-- Select paint colors from a wide variety of RAL tints-- NDD – Ninz Digital Decor, graphic images applied with

special ink jets and protected by a transparent topcoat. Infi nite varieties of customizable decorations in harmony with specifi c door settings-- Stainless steel handles -- Colored handles

Packaging for maximum protectionSturdy wooden crates protect all doors and related acces-sories-- NDD decorated doors-- Construction sites-- Shipping abroad-- Special transport

The following optional accessories make Rever doors irreversible, re-quiring the indication of the door opening direction when the order is placed:- SLASH panic bar- Panic bar for secondary leaves- Windows and ventilation grills- MAC locks- ELM/cisa and ELM/mt electric handle- Special locks (016 tir- Stel 15)- Overhead frame panels and prolungated frames- Special doorframes (SPEED, SOLID, TESCOP)

FeaturesREVER multipurpose doors

40

rev

er

mu

ltip

urp

ose

Specific optional accessoriesREVER multipurpose doors

MULTIPUrPOSe WINDOW

On request, the one- and two-leaved doors may be equipped with round or rectangular windows, with strati-fied 3 + 3 mm glass framed with a black rubber EPDM profile. The corners of rectangular windows are rounded (radius of approx. 100 mm).

Production limitsWindow sizes are standard and the minimum border strips around the window may not be reduced.



Ø 300 minimum 1950 Y=1600

Ø 300 less than 1950 Y=FM H - 350

Ø 400 minimum 2000 Y=1600

Ø 400 less than 2000 Y=FM H - 400


300 x 500 minimum 1950 Z=1500

300 x 500 less than 1950 Z=FM H - 450

400 x 700 minimum 2050 Z=1500

400 x 700 less than 2050 Z=FM H - 550

a

b

Y Z

b

a

KIT windowThe windows for Rever doors are also available as a KIT for later installation directly by the customer.

NOTEThe positions indicated above are standard.Different positions may be considered as long as they respect the mini-mum “a” and “b” border strips.

Round and rectangular window cross sections

39

Round Ø windowRectangular window

11

BorderBorder

Window dimensions minimum border FM L min. dimensions

a b

300 400 200 200 700

800

300400 200 200 L1 700 + L2 400

L1 800 + L2 400

300 400 200 200 L1 700 + L2 700

L1 800 + L2 800

300 x 500400 x 700 200 200 700

800

300 x 500400 x 700 200 200 L1 700 + L2 400

L1 800 + L2 400

300 x 500400 x 700 200 200 L1 700 + L2 700

L1 800 + L2 800

41

rev

er

mu

ltip

urp

ose


SPeCIAL ‚SPeeD‘ DOOrFrAMe FOr rever DOOrS

SPEED on three sides embracing doorframe with 45 deg. joints, made of 1,25 mm thick galvanized „Sendzimir“ processed sheet metal, assembly required. For installation onto finished walls using 6 integrated clamps and two adjustable spacers with plugs or screws. Includes rebate sealing and RAL painting with thermoset epoxy-polyester powders. Minimum 75mm wall thickness, 55/70 frames.

Order measurements required wall opening doorframe opening

FM L (width) FM L + 20 FM L - 64FM H (height) FM H + 10 FM H - 34

SPeCIAL ‚SOLID‘ DOOrFrAMe FOr rever DOOrS

SOLID on three sides embracing doorframe with 45 deg. joints, made of 1,25 mm thick galvanized „Sendzimir“ processed sheet metal, assembly required. For installation with anchors for mortar fixing or with iron bank to fix with plugs or screw on, including removable threshold spacer, sealing and RAL painting with thermoset epoxy-polyester powders. Minimum 50mm wall thickness, 45/45 frames.



SPeCIAL ‚TeSCOP‘ DOOrFrAMe FOr rever DOOrS

Two-pieced TESCOP on three sides embracing doorframe with 45 deg. joints, made of 1,25 mm thick galvanized „Sendzimir“ processed sheet metal, assembly required. To be fixed to finished wall with screws, including removable threshold spacer, sealing and RAL painting with thermoset epoxy-polyester powders. Minimum 70mm wall thickness, adjustment range of +25mm, frames 55/70.



Wall opening

Doorframe opening

48

FM Order measurements


Doorframe opening

18


Doorframe opening


55

70

15

4515

45


Doorframe opening


55

70

15


Doorframe opening


IM21 FrAMe eXTeNSION FOr rever DOOrS

Frame extension to be screwed to the Rever doorframe acting as a wall cladding. Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal painted the same color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Profile on three sides, upper corners with 45 degree joint.To mount the frame extension, fixing holes need to be drilled into doorframe on site. Combine with sealing to conceal the screw heads.

Minimum 60mm wall thickness.

INSTALLATION “IN THe reveAL” WITH BLOCK FrAMe

On request additional block profiles for one- and two-leaved multipurpose Rever doors. Consists of 3 sections of hollow 40x20x1,5mm metal profiles painted the same color as the doorframe using thermoset epoxy-polyester powders. Instal-lation with screws and plugs (screws and plugs not included).

Required wall opening = FM L + 36, FM H + 18

42

rev

er

mu

ltip

urp

ose


3 25

15

NOTEVentilating perforations are only provided on the main leaf of two-leaved doors.

Wal

l ope

ning

hei

ght (

cust

om m

ade)

2030

or 2

130

Wal

l ope

ning

hei

ght +

8

FFL

veNTILATION GrATe

Ventilation grate made of either black or white PVC, 482 x 99 mm (air passage approx. 150 cm2). The opening direc-tion of the door needs to be specified.

200

Minimum FML = 650 mm

veNTILATING PerFOrATIONS

Ventilating perforation for one- and two-leaved Rever doors and for the active leaf of two-leaved doors; made by perforating the illustrated pattern into the sheet met-al, air passage of approx. 200 cm2 per leaf. Rever doors with ventilating perforations remain reversible.

150

OverHeAD FrAMe PANeL WITH veNTILATING PerFOrATION

A prolungated frame with a galvanized, pre-drilled 12/10 mm thick piece of sheet metal to serve as the overhead frame panel with ventilating perforation, which also functions as the upper rebate for the leaf. Painted the same color as the leaf using thermoset epoxy-polyester powders. Also available for Speed, Solid and Tescop door-frames. Panel, leaf and frame require on-site assembly.

4 25

15

43

rev

er

mu

ltip

urp

ose


DOOr WITH eXTeNDeD FrAMe

Frame extends beyond the door leaf to create a 100 mm crack either below or both above and below. When using the standard Rever door leaf and an extended frame, the positioning of the handle is higher as a consequence.

Exte

rnal

fra

me

han

dle

h

eig

ht

han

dle

h

eig

ht

Exte

rnal

fra

me

THree-POINT SeCUr LOCK FOr rever DOOr

The SECUR version of Rever provides a more reliable door closure. Activating the lock with a key blocks the leaf in the frame at three points: in the center with the latch bolt, above with the rod that inserts into the upper strike box and below with the rod that inserts into the lower strike box.

Also available as a KIT for on-site installation. SECUR Rev-er doors remain reversible.

Additional locking points

FF reBATe SeALING

FF sealing in black extruded profile to be pressed into the dedicated groove of the perimetral frame. FF sealing in black extruded profile self-adhesive for ap-plication to the central joint of two-leaved doors.


Handle height external frame required wall openingcrack below FM H / 2 + 150 FM H + 108 FM H + 100crack below and above FM H / 2 + 150 FM H + 208 FM H + 200

upper strike box lower strike box (bushing)

NOTE

Not available in the anti panic version.

perimetral frame central joint for two-leaved doors

44

rev

er

mu

ltip

urp

ose

Door cross sections - MeasurementsREVER multipurpose doors

Doors without lower thresholdVertical cross section

Door

fram

e op

enin

g =

FM H

-40

Wal

l ope

ning

FM

H

Exte

rior d

oorf

ram

e =

FM H

+8

FFL

+15

+5


Door

fram

e op

enin

g =

FM H

- 40

Wal

l ope

ning

FM

H

Exte

rior d

oorf

ram

e =

FM H

+ 8

FFL+

15+

5


+20+10 , FM H


make it easier to fill the gap between the wall and the doorframe with cement mortar.For dry wall installation, the holes must be precise and greater toler-ance ranges should not be employed.

FFL = Finished Floor Level

One-leaved doors Horizontal cross section

Wall opening FM L



+20+10

Doors with internal and external lower thresholdVertical cross section

Door

fram

e op

enin

g=

FM H

-72

Wal

l ope

ning

FM

H

Exte

rior d

oorf

ram

e =

FM H

+24

FFL

+15

+5




L1L2

Wall opening FM L = L1+ L2


+20+10

Leaf thicknessMULTIPURPOSE 40 mm

45

rev

er

mu

ltip

urp

oseINSTALLATION WITH ANCHOrS FOr MOrTAr FIXING

For mortar fixing, appropriate cuts will need to be created in the walls (section 80 x 160 mm) or the anchors should be fixed with expansion screws. The anchors should be bent and blocked inside the wall. For best mechanical hold, the space between the doorframe and the masonry should al-ways be filled with concrete mortar or polyurethane foam.

INSTALLATION FOr eXPANSION SCreWS FIXING

For the installation with expansion screws, the anchors serve as spacers and should not be bent. Using Würth type art. 0910436112 plugs or similar (supplied at the custom-er’s expense), installation is done with expansion screws into the pre-drilled holes present on the frame. For the best mechanical hold, the space between the doorframe and the masonry should always be filled with concrete mortar or polyurethane foam.

ANCHOr POSITIONING

One-leaved doorsRight opening and Left opening

--


Left opening

(*) For proper installation, the cuts for the anchors should be 200 x 160 mm in size.

Installation methodsREVER multipurpose doors

46

rev

er

mu

ltip

urp

ose

Order measurementsREVER multipurpose doors

OrDer MeASUreMeNTS

Wall Opening

------

One-leaved door FM L x FM H PT L x PT Hstandard dimensions doorframe opening

700 x 2050 / 2150 626 x 2010 / 2110 800 x 2050 / 2150 726 x 2010 / 2110 900 x 2050 / 2150 826 x 2010 / 21101000 x 2050 / 2150 926 x 2010 / 21101100 x 2050 / 2150 1026 x 2010 / 21101350 x 2050 / 2150 1276 x 2010 / 2110

semi-standard dimensions

from 500 to 1345 x 2050 / 2150 from 526 to 1271 x 2010 / 2110

non-standard dimensions

from 500 to 1350 x from 1780 to 2150 from 526 to 1276 x from 1740 to 2110

Two-leaved doors FM L (L1+L2) x FM H PT L x PT Hstandard dimensions doorframe opening1200 ( 800 + 400) x 2050 / 2150 1126 x 2010 / 21101300 ( 900 + 400) x 2050 / 2150 1226 x 2010 / 21101400 ( 700 + 700) x 2050 / 2150 1326 x 2010 / 21101600 ( 800 + 800) x 2050 / 2150 1526 x 2010 / 21101800 ( 900 + 900) x 2050 / 2150 1726 x 2010 / 21102000 (1000 + 1000) x 2050 / 2150 1926 x 2010 / 2110


from 900 (500+400) to 2000 (1000 +1000) x 2050 / 2150 from 826 to 1926 x 2010 / 2110


from 900 (500+400) to 2000 (1000 +1000) x from 1780 to 2150 from 826 to 1926 x 1740 / 2110

NOTE Buyers should be aware that pursuant to and in accordance with Leg-islative Decree dd. 19.09.1994 Nr. 626, resp. of Legislative Decree dd. 19.03.1996 Nr. 242, all doors used for emergency exits or routes musthave a minimum height of 2000 mm (= nominal wall opening

Doorframe opening

-----

One-leaved doorsPTL = FML - 74PTH = FMH - 40

Two-leaved doorsPTL = FML - 74PTH = FMH - 40

2040 mm). Unless specified otherwise by the customer, two-leaved standard, semi-standard and customized doors are supplied with a right pull opening direction.

47

rev

er

mu

ltip

urp

ose

Opening measurements - EncumbrancesREVER multipurpose doors

OPeNING MeASUreMeNTS AND eNCUMBrANCe WITH 90 DeGree OPeNING


-----

Net passage calculationpanic bar type protrusion one-leaved door two-leaved door EXUS 125 FML - 209 FML - 344TWIST 100 FML - 184 FML - 294SLASH 75 FML - 159 FML - 244TOUCHBAR 74 FML - 158 FML - 242z = leaf protrusion relative to the wall

FML + 11 L1 + 11 L2 + 56

eNCUMBrANCe WITH 180 DeGree OPeNING - HANDLe HeIGHT

One-leaved door x = FML - 4 h handle = FMH/2 + 50


REVER - GENERAL NOTESAll rights reserved. No reproduction (partial or total) without prior authori-zation by Ninz. Ninz reserves the right to modify the product. Installation should be executed by qualified technicians.


Two-leaved doorx = L1 - 4 y = L2 + 42h handle = FMH/2 + 50

Modifications may only be made as indicated in the installation instructions.Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.

“the quality multipurpose, reversible and heat-insulated“

UNIVER NINZ DoorsMULTIPURPOSE VERSION

FEATURES 50 - 53







50

UN

IVER

mu

ltip

urp

ose

One-leaved doors

Two-leaved doors

FeaturesUNIVER multipurpose doors

THE HIGH QUALITY MULTIPURPOSE

“Quality first”-- Solid design and manufacture-- Fully galvanized door, including the “hidden” parts-- Made of “Sendzimir” process hot-galvanized sheet metal-- Corrosion protection also provided along cut edges of the metal sheets-- Painted with epoxy-polyester thermoset powders in a 180 degrees (Celsius) oven-- Substantial paint layer (70 microns plus)-- Optimal corrosion resistance demonstrated by 500 hour salt-fog test-- Unaffected by severe climate changes, demonstrated by 2000 hours with +60° to -10° cycles at 75% humidity-- Finishing with high-quality aesthetics-- Orange skin anti-scratch structured paint-- Customizable with wide selection of RAL colors

“Practicality of use” -- Door reversibility*-- Indication of door opening direction not necessary-- Reduction of stock for retailers-- Simplifies choices for end customers-- Easy installation

“Versatility”-- Suitable for multiple uses because of its sturdiness-- May be ordered with marking for external use-- Vast assortment of accessories -- Customized measurements also available






51

UN

IVER

mu

ltip

urp

oseSTANDARD ELEMENTS

which comprise Univer multipurpose doors:

Door leaf-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal, press folded and electro welded-- Perimetral rebate on 4 sides-- Heat-insulated with mineral wool-- Internal stiffeners for overhead door closer and panic bar-- Thickness of 50 mm

Doorframe-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal-- Grooves for rebate sealing-- Suitable for anchors for mortar fixing or expansion screws-- Detachable rebate for application on finished flooring-- Removable threshold for thresholdless installation-- Strike plates in PA6 black nylon for lock bolt-- Assembled doorframes for one-leaved doors-- Assembly required for two-leaved doorframes

Hinges-- Nr. 2 three-wing hinges for each leaf-- of which one 1 ball-bearing hinge with screws for vertical

adjustment of the leaf, marked as per EN 1935, classi-fied for up to 160 kg load, 200.000 cycles durability, suit-able for fire door use-- and one hinge with self-closing spring

Safety bolts-- Nr. 3 safety bolts applied on hinge side doorframe edge


Handle-- PA6 black nylon handle-- Fastener screws to pass-- Insert for patent-type key



52

UN

IVER

mu

ltip

urp

ose INCLUDED ACCESSORIES

which comprise Univer multipurpose doors:

Safety lock-- Central latch for blocking and unblocking the passive leaf-- Lever control for unlocking vertical rods

Upper coupling system for the secondary leaf-- Vertical rod with steel point which inserts into the up-per strike box-- Upper strike box in black PA6 nylon with steel roller

Lower coupling system for the secondary leaf-- Vertical rod with steel point which inserts into lower strike box-- Floor catch (floor-mounted bushing) in black nylon, for doors without threshold-- Floor catch in black nylon with steel roller, for doors with threshold

Identification plate-- Metal tag with door identification data

Finishing-- Standard paint with epoxy-polyester thermoset powders

in a 180 degrees oven, orange skin, anti-scratch finishing-- Standard pastel turquoise color, lighter tone for the leaf

(NCS4020-B50G), darker tone for the frame (NCS5020-B50G)

Standard packaging-- Single door wrapped into stretchable polyethylene (PE) film-- Assembled doorframes for one-leaved doors-- Assembly required for doorframes for two-leaved doors-- Palletized on wooden pallets

Pre-settings-- Each door is ready for the installation of a three-point SECUR lock-- The main lock and upper rod housing on the secondary

leaf are ready for installation of the latching mechanism for panic bars

Door weight kg/m2 of wall opening1 leaf 232 leaves 22



53

UN

IVER

mu

ltip

urp

oseOPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

A wide variety of accessories and surface fi nishes are avail-able on request for maximum value enhancement of Univ-er doors to your own specifi c needs.


Safety-related needs-- Doors for panic exits (see panic bars)-- Doors for emergency exits (see emergency exit handles)-- Univer three-point SECUR lock

Installation and utilization needs-- Frame extensions-- Drip steel-profi le-- Kick and protection plates-- Windows-- Ventilation grills


Performance enhancing-- Sealing-- Cylinders-- Door closers-- Special handles

NOTEDetails about optional accessories may be found in the present bro-chure in chapters:- Finishing - Accessories for metal doors- Panic exit devicesRight-opening (Right) doors are the default selection if opening direc-tion is not specifi ed.


Packaging for maximum protectionSturdy wooden crates protect all doors and related acces-sories- NDD decorated doors- Construction sites- Shipping abroad- Special transport

The following optional accessoires make Univer doors irreversible, requir-ing the indication of the door opening direction when the order is placed:- SLASH panic bar- Panic bar for secondary leaves- Window and ventilation grills- MAC locks- ELM/cisa and ELM/mt electric handle- Special locks (016 tir- Stel 15)


54

UN

IVER

mu

ltip

urp

ose

Specific optional accessoriesUNIVER multipurpose doors

MULTIPURPOSE WINDOW WITH METAL WINDOW FRAME

Upon request one- and two-leaved doors may be equipped with round or rectangular windows, with different types of glass and window frames.


Borders, window position„Border measurement“ refers to the distance from the edge of the window to the wall opening of the door.

Elevation for round windowswindow dimensions FM H position

Ø 300 minimum 1950 Y=1600Ø 300 less than 1950 Y=FM H - 350Ø 400 minimum 2150 Y=1600Ø 400 1950-2149 Y=1550Ø 400 less than 1950 Y=FM H - 400

Elevation of rectangular windowswindow dimensions L x H FM H position

250/300 x 400 minimum 2150 Z=1450250/300 x 400 1950-2149 Z=1350250/300 x 400 less than 1950 Z=FM H - 600

a

b

Y

b

a

Z

Window dimensions min. border dimensions FM L min.a b

Ø 300 Ø 400 200 200 700

800

Ø 300Ø 400 200 200 L1 700 + L2 400

L1 800 + L2 400

Ø 300 Ø 400 200 200 L1 700 + L2 700

L1 800 + L2 800

250 x 400 300 x 400 200 200 650

700

250 x 400 300 x 400 200 200 L1 650 + L2 400

L1 700 + L2 400

250 x 400 300 x 400 200 200 L1 650 + L2 650

L1 700 + L2 700

Glasses available Shapes availablescreened 6,5 mm rectangularscreened crystal 6,5 mm rectangularlaminated 3 + 3 mm rectangular, circularlaminated 4 + 4 mm rectangularchamber 4 + 12 + 4 mm rectangular


54 17

Window ØBorder Border


Window LxH

15

Border Border

50

NOTEThe positions indicated above are standard.Different positions may be considered as long as they respect the minimum „a“ and „b“ border strips. The window itself may not be supplied separately except for replacements. It is always advisable to equip doors with windows with a closing regulator.

55

UN

IVER

mu

ltip

urp

ose


MULTIPURPOSE WINDOW WITH RUBBER WINDOW FRAME

On request, one- and two-leaved doors may be equipped with round or rectangular windows, with laminated 3 + 3 mm glass framed with a black rubber EPDM profile.

The corners of rectangular windows are rounded (radius of approx. 100 mm).

Production limitsWindow sizes are standard and the minimum window bor-der strip measurements may not be reduced.


Elevation of round windowswindow dimensions FM H position

Ø 300 minimum 1950 Y=1600Ø 300 less than 1950 Y=FM H - 350Ø 400 minimum 2000 Y=1600Ø 400 less than 2000 Y=FM H - 400


300 x 500 minimum 1950 Z=1500300 x 500 less than 1950 Z=FM H - 450400 x 700 minimum 2050 Z=1500400 x 700 less than 2050 Z=FM H - 550

a

b

Y Z

b

a

NOTEThe positions indicated above are standard.Different positions may be considered as long as they respect the mini-mum “a” and “b” borders. It is always advisable for doors with win-dows to be equipped with door closers for controlled closing.

Round and rectangular window cross sections

39


11

BorderBorder

Window dimensions minimum border FM L min. dimensionsa b

300 400 200 200 700

800

300400 200 200 L1 700 + L2 400

L1 800 + L2 400

300 400 200 200 L1 700 + L2 700

L1 800 + L2 800

300 x 500400 x 700 200 200 700

800

300 x 500400 x 700 200 200 L1 700 + L2 400

L1 800 + L2 400

300 x 500400 x 700 200 200 L1 700 + L2 700

L1 800 + L2 800

56

UN

IVER

mu

ltip

urp

ose


Wall opening

73

Doorframe opening -3mmon each side

Frame extension IM 11

50

Wall opening

Doorframe opening -3mmon each side

Frame extension IM 13

FRAME EXTENSIONS FOR UNIVER DOORS

IM 11Frame extensions to be mounted in addition to the Univer frame acting as wall cladding. Made of „Sendzimir“ proc-essed hot-galvanized sheet metal and painted the same color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Pro-file on three sides, upper corners with 45 degree joint, fix-ing with screws and plugs (screws and plugs not included).

IM 11: for 50mm door thickness, for installation on 70mm (min.) wall thickness

IM 13Telescopic frame extension to be screwed to the Univer doorframe acting as wall cladding. Consists of two over-lapping profiles with a 25mm adjustable range. Made of „Sendzimir“ processed hot-galvanized sheet metal paint-ed the same color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Profile on three sides, upper corners with 90 de-gree joint.Complete with fastener screws. To mount the frame ex-tension, fixing holes need to be drilled into doorframe on site. Combine with sealing to conceal the screw heads.

IM 13: for 50mm door thickness, for installation on 125mm (min.) wall thickness

VENTILATION GRATE


200

Minimum FML = 650 mm

57

UN

IVER

mu

ltip

urp

ose


THREE-POINT SECUR LOCK FOR UNIVER DOOR

The SECUR version for Univer provides a more reliable door closure. Activating the lock with a key blocks the leaf in the frame at three points: in the center with the latch bolt, above with the rod that inserts into the upper strike box and below with the rod that inserts into the lower strike box.

ATTENTIONNot available in the anti panic version.

FF REBATE SEALING

FF sealing in black extruded profile to be pressed into the dedicated groove of the perimetral frame. FF sealing in black extruded profile self-adhesive for ap-plication to the central joint of two-leaved doors.


upper strike box lower strike box (bushing)

Additional locking points

58

UN

IVER

mu

ltip

urp

ose Doors without lower threshold


Wal

l ope

ning

FM

H

Exte

rior d

oorf

ram

e =

FM H

+13

FFL

+15

+5

Door

fram

e op

enin

g =

FM H

-72


32

Wal

l ope

ning

FM

H

Exte

rior d

oorf

ram

e =F

M H

+13

FFL

+15

+5

Door

fram

e op

enin

g =

FM H

-72


+20+10 , FM H


make it easier to fill the gap between the wall and the doorframe with cement mortar. For dry wall installation, the holes must be precise and greater tolerance ranges should not be employed.

FFL = Finished Floor Level

Door cross sections - MeasurementsUNIVER multipurpose doors

One-leaved doors Horizontal cross section

Wall opening FM L



+20+10

Doors with internal and external lower thresholdVertical cross section

Exte

rior d

oorf

ram

e =F

M H

+34

FFL

Wal

l ope

ning

FM

H+

15+

5

Door

fram

e op

enin

g =

FM H

-72


Active leaf opening = L1 - 82


L1L2

Wall opening FM L = L1 + L2


+20+10


59

UN

IVER

mu

ltip

urp

oseINSTALLATION WITH ANCHORS FOR MORTAR FIXING

For mortar fixing, appropriate cuts will need to be created in the walls (section 80 x 200 mm) or the anchors should be fixed with expansion screws. The anchors should be bent and blocked inside the wall. For best mechanical hold, the space between the doorframe and the masonry should al-ways be filled with concrete mortar or polyurethane foam.


For the installation with expansion screws, the anchors serve as spacers and should not be bent. Using Würth type art. 0910436112 plugs or similar (supplied at the customer’s expense), installation is done with expansion screws into the pre-drilled holes present on the frame. For the best mechanical hold, the space between the doorframe and the masonry should always be filled with concrete mortar or polyurethane foam.

ANCHOR POSITIONING

One-leaved doorsRight opening Left opening

-----


Left opening

Installation methodsUNIVER multipurpose doors

60

UN

IVER

mu

ltip

urp

ose

Order measurementsUNIVER multipurpose doors

ORDER MEASUREMENTS

Wall Opening Doorframe opening

----- -

One-leaved door FM L x FM H PT L x PT Hstandard dimensions doorframe opening 800 x 2050 / 2150 726 x 2010 / 2110900 x 2050 / 2150 826 x 2010 / 21101000 x 2050 / 2150 926 x 2010 / 21101100 x 2050 / 2150 1026 x 2010 / 21101200 x 2050 / 2150 1126 x 2010 / 21101350 x 2050 / 2150 1276 x 2010 / 2110

semi-standard dimensionsfrom 500 to 1345 x 2050 / 2150 from 426 to 1266 x 2010 / 2110

non-standard dimensionsfrom 540 to 1350 x from 1780 to 2150 from 466 to 1276 x from 1740 to 2110

Two-leaved doors FM L (L1+L2) x FM H PT L x PT Hstandard dimensions doorframe opening 1150 ( 750 + 400) x 2050 / 2150 1076 x 2010 / 21101200 ( 800 + 400) x 2050 / 2150 1126 x 2010 / 21101250 ( 800 + 450) x 2050 / 2150 1176 x 2010 / 21101300 ( 900 + 400) x 2050 / 2150 1226 x 2010 / 21101350 ( 900 + 450) x 2050 / 2150 1276 x 2010 / 21101400 (1000 + 400) x 2050 / 2150 1326 x 2010 / 21101450 (1000 + 450) x 2050 / 2150 1376 x 2010 / 21101600 ( 800 + 800) x 2050 / 2150 1526 x 2010 / 21101700 ( 900 + 800) x 2050 / 2150 1626 x 2010 / 21101800 ( 900 + 900) x 2050 / 2150 1726 x 2010 / 21101900 (1000 + 900) x 2050 / 2150 1826 x 2010 / 21102000 (1000 +1000) x 2050 / 2150 1926 x 2010 / 2110

semi-standard dimensionsfrom 900 (500+400) to 2000 (1000+1000) x 2050 / 2150 from 826 to 1926 x 2010 / 2110

non-standard dimensionsfrom 900 (500+400) to 2000 (1000+1000) x from 1780 to 2150 from 826 to 1926 x from 1740 to 2110

NOTE Buyers should be aware that pursuant to and in accordance with Leg-islative Decree dd. 19.09.1994 Nr. 626, resp. of Legislative Decree dd. 19.03.1996 Nr. 242, all doors used for emergency exits or routes

One-leaved doors PT L = FM L - 74PT H = FM H - 40

Two-leaved doorsPT L = FM L - 74PT H = FM H - 40

2040 mm). Unless specified otherwise by the customer, two-leaved standard, semi-standard and customized doors are supplied with a right-pull opening direction.

61

UN

IVER

mu

ltip

urp

ose

Opening measurements - EncumbrancesUNIVER multipurpose doors


Two-leaved doorx = L1 + 4 y = L2 + 50h handle = FMH/2 + 50

Modifications may only be made as indicated in the installation instructions.Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.

must have a minimum height of 2000 mm (= nominal wall opening OPENING MEASUREMENTS AND ENCUMBRANCE WITH 90 DEGREE OPENING


Net passage calculationpanic bar type protrusion one-leaved door two-leaved doorEXUS 125 FML - 226 FML - 378TWIST 100 FML - 201 FML - 328SLASH 75 FML - 176 FML - 278TOUCHBAR 74 FML - 175 FML - 276z = leaf protrusionrelative to the wall

FML + 29 L1 + 30 L2 + 75


One-leaved doorx = FML + 4h handle = FMH/2 + 50


UNIVER MULTIPURPOSE - GENERAL NOTESAll rights reserved. No reproduction (partial or total) without prior authorization by Ninz. Ninz reserves the right to modify the product. Installation should be executed by qualified technicians.

“safer because they are sturdier“

PROGET NINZ DoorsMULTIPURPOSE vERSION

FEATURES 64 - 67

SPECIFIC OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES - WINDOWS 68 - 74


STANDARD INSTALLATION METHODS 76 - 77


OPENING MEASUREMENTS - MAXIMUM ENCUMBRANCE 79


64

PRO

GET

m

ult

ipu

rpo

se

One-leaved doors

Two-leaved doors

Features PROGET multipurpose doors

THE MULTIPURPOSE DOOR IN A CLASS OF ITS OWN

„Indisputable quality“-- Especially sturdy door for safe functioning over time-- Built to order for all kinds of requests-- Fully galvanized door, including the “hidden” parts-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal-- Corrosion protection also provided along cut edges of the metal sheets-- Painted with epoxy-polyester thermoset powders in a 180 degrees (Celsius) oven-- Substantial paint layer (70 microns plus)-- Optimal corrosion resistance demonstrated by 500 hour salt-fog test-- Unaffected by severe climate changes, demonstrated by 2000 hours with +60° to -10° cycles at 75% humidity-- Finishing with high-quality aesthetics-- Orange skin anti-scratch structured paint -- Customizable with wide selection of RAL colors

“Practicality of use” -- Truly sturdy frame that facilitates anchoring to the wall-- Suitable for all types of walls-- Ample size range-- Wide variety of accessories-- Easy installation

“Versatility”-- Very wide field of application-- Can be combined with various frame types-- Installation onto any wall type-- Installation with a block frame possible-- May be ordered with marking for external use


Opening directionOpening direction needs to be indicated while ordering



NOTEThe colors represented in the photos are not standard.Door closer provided upon request only.

65

PRO

GET

m

ult

ipu

rpo

seSTANDARD ELEMENTS


Door leaf-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal, press folded and electro welded-- Perimetral rebate on 3 sides, flat at the bottom-- Internally reinforced with hot-galvanized steel profiles-- Heat-insulated treated mineral wool packing that is rigidly

joined to the sheet metal-- Internal stiffeners for overhead door closer and panic bar-- Single thickness of 60 mm

Standard frame-- Sturdy profile with a sizeable cross section-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal-- Equipped with special assembly brackets-- Grooves for rebeate sealing-- Standard installation via anchors for mortar fixing-- Upon request installation via expansion or installation screws-- Lower spacer, mounting template-- Rests on finished flooring without rebate-- Strike plates in PA6 black nylon for lock bolt and safety bolts-- Assembly required for doorframes

Hinges-- Nr. 2 three-wing hinges for each leaf-- of which one ball-bearing hinge with screws for vertical adjustment of the leaf, marked as per EN 1935, clas-sified for up to 160 kg load, 200.000 cycles durability, suitable for fire door use-- and one hinge with self-closing spring

Safety bolts-- Nr. 1 sturdy safety bolt applied on hinge side leaf edge


Handle -- Handle in black PA6 nylon with steel core-- Steel installation plate with cylinder hole-- Backplate in black PA6 nylon-- Fastener screws and patent key insert

NOTECylinder and sealing provided on request only.The handle requires assembly.

Features PROGET multipurpose doors

66

PRO

GET

m

ult

ipu

rpo

se INCLUDED ACCESSORIES

which comprise Proget multipurpose doors:

Locking mechanism on secondary leaf-- “Flush-bolt” automatic latching of the passive leaf-- Lever control for unlocking

Upper coupling system for the secondary leaf-- Secondary leaf lock activated device which inserts rod into the upper strike box-- Upper strike box in pierced steel with steel roller

Lower coupling system for the secondary leaf-- Vertical rod with steel point which inserts into lower strike box-- Lower floor catch (floor-mounted bushing) made of black nylon with rebate stopper

Identification plate-- Metal tag with door identification data

Finishing -- Standard paint with epoxy-polyester thermoset pow-ders in a 180 degrees oven, orange skin, anti-scratch finishing-- Standard pastel turquoise color, lighter tone for the leaf (NCS4020-B50G), darker tone for the frame (NCS5020-B50G

Standard packaging-- Single leaf wrapped into stretchable polyethylene (PE) film-- Single packaging for each doorframe with stretchable polyethylene (PE) film-- Palletized on wooden pallets

Door weight kg/m2 of wall opening1 leaf 292 leaves 26


FeaturesPROGET multipurpose doors

67

PRO

GET

m

ult

ipu

rpo

seOPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

A wide variety of accessories and surface fi nishes are avail-able on request for maximum value enhancement of Pro-get doors to your own specifi c needs.


Safety-related needs-- Doors for panic exits (see panic bars)-- Doors for emergency exits (see emergency exit handles)-- Three-point locking mechanism

Installation and utilization needs-- Special frames-- Frame extensions-- Floor-mounted fl oor catch in galvanized steel-- Drip steel-profi le-- Special installation screws-- Kick and protection plates-- Rectangular windows, standard or built to order-- Round windows-- Wide variety of grates


Performance enhancing-- Sealing-- Cylinders-- Door closers-- Special handles


Packaging for maximum protectionSturdy wooden crates protect all doors and related acces-sories- NDD decorated doors- Construction sites- Shipping abroad- Special transport

NOTEDetails about optional accessories may be found in the present bro-chure in chapters:- Finishing - Accessories for metal doors- Panic exit devices

FeaturesPROGET multipurpose doors

68

PRO

GET

m

ult

ipu

rpo

se

Specific optional accessories - WindowsPROGET multipurpose doors

MULTIPURPOSE WINDOW WITH METAL WINDOW FRAME

Upon request one- and two-leaved doors may be equipped with round or rectangular windows, with different types of glass and window frames.




Ø 300 minimum 1950 Y=1600Ø 300 less than 1950 Y=FM H - 350Ø 400 minimum 2150 Y=1600Ø 400 from 1950 to 2149 Y=1550Ø 400 less than 1950 Y=FM H - 400


250/300/400 x 400 minimum 2150 Z=1450250/300/400 x 400 from 1950 to 2149 Z=1350250/300/400 x 400 less than 950 Z=FM H - 600400 x 600 minimum 2150 Z=1250400 x 600 from 1950 to 2149 Z=1150400 x 600 less than 1950 Z=FM H - 800400 x 1200 minimum 2150 Z=650400 x 1200 from 1950 to 2149 Z=550400 x 1200 less than 1950 Z=FM H - 1400400 x 600 KIPP minimum 2150 Z=1250400 x 600 KIPP from 2050 to 2149 Z=1150400 x 600 KIPP less than 2050 Z=FM H - 800min. 250 x 250 Z=as indicated by costumer

Borders, window position

a

b

Y

b

a

Z


54

Window Ø

17

BorderBorder


15

Window LxH Border

50

Border

KIPP window cross sectionwith opening on the hinge side

Border BorderWindow LxH

50 13

69

PRO

GET

m

ult

ipu

rpo

se


Window dimensions min. border dimensions FM L min.a b

Ø 300 Ø 400 200 200 700

800

Ø 300Ø 400 200 200 L1 700 + L2 350

L1 800 + L2 350

Ø 300 Ø 400 200 200 L1 700 + L2 700

L1 800 + L2 800

250 x 400 200 200 650300 x 400 200 200 700400 x 400 200 200 800400 x 600 200 200 800400 x 1200 200 200 800

Windows made to order min.250x250 200 200 650

400 x 600 KIPP 300 300 1000

Glasses available shapes availablescreened glass 6,5 mm rectangularscreened crystal glass 6,5 mm rectangularlaminated glass 3 + 3 mm rectangular, circularlaminated glass 4 + 4 mm rectangularglass chamber 4 + 12 + 4 mm rectangularscreened glass 6,5 mm Kipp rectangular

NOTEPosition and measurements indicated above are for standard.Different positions may be considered as long as they respect the mini-mum “a” and “b” border strips. The window itself may not be supplied separately except for replacements. It is always advisable for doors with windows to be equipped with door closers for controlled closing.

Window dimensions min. border dimensions FM L min.a b L1 L2

250 x 400 200 200 L1 650 + L2 350 300 x 400 200 200 L1 700 + L2 350400 x 400 200 200 L1 800 + L2 350400 x 600 200 200 L1 800 + L2 350400 x 1200 200 200 L1 800 + L2 350

Windows made to order min.250x250 200 200 L1 650 + L2 350

400 x 600 KIPP 300 300 L1 1000 + L2 350250 x 400 200 200 L1 650 + L2 650300 x 400 200 200 L1 700 + L2 700400 x 400 200 200 L1 800 + L2 800400 x 600 200 200 L1 800 + L2 800400 x 1200 200 200 L1 800 + L2 800

Windows made to order min.250x250 200 200 L1 650 + L2 650

400 x 600 KIPP 300 300 L1 1000 + L2 1000

70

PRO

GET

m

ult

ipu

rpo

se


MULTIPURPOSE WINDOW WITH RUBBER WINDOW FRAME

On request, one- and two-leaved doors may be equipped with round or rectangular windows, with laminated 3 + 3 mm glass framed with a black rubber EPDM profile.The corners of rectangular windows are rounded (radius of approx. 100 mm).




Ø 300 minimum 1950 Y=1600Ø 300 less than 1950 Y=FM H - 350Ø 400 minimum 2000 Y=1600Ø 400 less than 2000 Y=FM H - 400


300 x 500 minimum 1950 Z=1500300 x 500 less than 1950 Z=FM H - 450400 x 700 minimum 2050 Z=1500400 x 700 less than 2050 Z=FM H - 550

a

b

Y Z

b

a

NOTEThe positions indicated above are standard.Different positions may be considered as long as they respect the mini-mum “a” and “b” border strips. The window itself may not be supplied separately except for replacements. It is always advisable for doors with windows to be equipped with door closers for controlled closing.

Round and rectangular window cross sections39


11

BorderBorder

Window dimensions minimum border FM L min. dimensionsa b

Ø 300 Ø 400 200 200 700

800

Ø 300Ø 400 200 200 L1 700 + L2 350

L1 800 + L2 350

Ø 300 Ø 400 200 200 L1 700 + L2 700

L1 800 + L2 800

300 x 500400 x 700 200 200 700

800

300 x 500400 x 700 200 200 L1 700 + L2 350

L1 800 + L2 350

300 x 500400 x 700 200 200 L1 700 + L2 700

L1 800 + L2 800

71

PRO

GET

m

ult

ipu

rpo

sevENTILATING GRATES WITH METAL FRAMES

To permit continuous air movement through the door, dif-ferent types of ventilating grates are available upon re-quest in standard or non-standard formats. The screw-on metal frames for the ventilating grates are painted the same color as the leaf using thermoset epoxy-polyester powders. On request air fl ow estimates calculated by a special program can be supplied for the dimensions of the ventilating grates.

Grate with steel grate platesGrate with steel grate plates only. Standard production em-ploys angled steel grate plates that slope downwards in the same direction as the door pull. Standard 200 mm elevation above the fi nished fl oor.

Dimensions L x H estimated air flow300 x 400 500 cm2

400 x 600 1100 cm2

400 x 1200 2500 cm2

to order by request

Grate with steel grate plates and anti-rodent meshSteel grate with steel grate plates overlaid with a metal anti-rodent mesh (11 x 11 x 1 mm sheet). Standard production em-ploys angled steel grate plates that slope downwards in the same direction as the door pull. Standard 200 mm elevation above the fi nished fl oor.


400 x 600 900 cm2

400 x 1200 2000 cm2

to order by request

Grate with steel grate plates and anti-insect meshSteel grate plate with grate plates overlaid with a metal anti-insect mesh (5 x 5 x 0,5 mm sheet). Standard produc-tion employs angled steel grate plates that slope down-wards in the same direction as the door pull. Standard 200 mm elevation above the fi nished fl oor.


400 x 600 800 cm2

400 x 1200 2000 cm2

to order by request

Anti-rodent meshMetal frame with metal anti-rodent mesh only (16 x 16 x 3 mm sheet). Standard 200 mm height above the fi nished fl oor.

Dimensions L x H300 x 400400 x 600400 x 1200to order

x

min

. 200

min. 200

x = 200 mm for grate heights up to 1200 mmx = 500 mm for grate heights over 1200 mm

Hing

e si

de

Hing

e si

de

Hing

e si

de

Hing

e si

de

Specifi c optional accessoriesPROGET multipurpose doors

72

PRO

GET

m

ult

ipu

rpo

se FRAME EXTENSIONS FOR PROGET DOORS

IM 1Frame extensions to be mounted in addition to the Pro-get frame acting as a wall cladding. Made of „Sendzimir“ processed hot-galvanized sheet metal and painted the same color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester pow-ders. Profile on three sides, upper corners with 45 degree joint, fixing with screws and plugs in groove (screws and plugs not included).

IM 3Frame extensions to be mounted in addition to the Pro-get acting as a wall cladding, especially for plasterboard. Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal and painted the same color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Profile on three sides, upper corners with 45 degree joint, fixing with screws and plugs (screws and plugs not included).

IM 4Frame extension to be screwed to the Proget doorframe acting as a wall cladding. Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal painted the same color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Profile on three sides, upper corners with 90 degree joint.Complete with fastener screws. To mount the frame ex-tension, fixing holes need to be drilled into doorframe on site. Combine with sealing to conceal the screw heads.

IM 5Telescopic frame extension to be screwed to the Proget doorframe acting as a wall cladding for expansion screw fixing. Consists of two overlapping profiles with a 25mm adjustable range. Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-gal-vanized sheet metal painted the same color as the door-frame with epoxy-polyester powders. Profile on three sides, upper corners with 90 degree joint.Complete with fastener screws. To mount the frame ex-tension pre-drilled holes are available on the frame. Com-bine with sealing to conceal the screw heads.

vENTILATION GRATE


200

FM L minimum = 700 mm

73

Wall opening


73

Wall opening


73

Wall opening


73

Wall opening


Dimensions estimated air flow482 x 99 150 cm²

Specific optional accessoriesPROGET multipurpose doors

73

PRO

GET

m

ult

ipu

rpo

se


SPECIAL FRAMES FOR PROGET MULTIPURPOSE DOORS

Embracing three sided frame for Proget multipurpose doors with 45 degree corner joints, made of 1,25 mm thick “Sendzimir” processed galvanized steel sheets. To be screwed to finished walls, including joints for assembly, hole-covering caps, sealing and RAL painting with ther-moset epoxy-polyester powder paints. Pre-drilled screw holes present on the doorframe.Installation screws not included.

Order measurements required wall opening doorframe openingFM L (width) FM L FM L - 80 mmFM H (height) FM H FM H - 40 mm

BLOCK FRAME FOR IN THE REvEAL (TUNNEL) APPLICATIONS

Three sided block frame application of Proget multipur-pose doors with 45 degrees corner joints, made of 1,25 mm thick “Sendzimir” processed galvanized steel sheets. To be screwed to finished walls and equipped with 6 in-tegrated attachment shackles. Includes assembly joints, hole-covering caps, sealing and RAL painting with ther-moset epoxy-polyester powder paints. Pre-drilled screw holes present on the doorframe.Installation screws not included.

Order measurements required wall opening doorframe openingFM L (width) FM L + 70 mm FM L - 80 mmFM H (height) FM H + 35 mm FM H - 40 mm

Minimum wall thickness for multipurpose doors = 70 mm

Order measurements = FM

Doorframe opening

20 50

Order measurements = FM

Opening to create (FM L + 70; FM H + 35)

35

50

Doorframe opening

20

min

. 100

74

PRO

GET

m

ult

ipu

rpo

se


THREE-POINT LOCKING MECHANISM

Upon request for a more reliable closure, one- and two-leaved Proget multipurpose doors may be delivered with a three-point lateral lock. In combination with double M1 handle and cylinder. The lock is also available for anti-panic and emergency push versions. Thus the three-point locking mechanism can be combined with emergency handles or with EXUS, TWIST, SLASH type BM panic bars in conformity with marking.

Additional closure points

STEEL FLOOR CATCH

Floor-mounted steel floor catch for two-leaved Proget doors. Made of pierced and successively galvanized steel. Includes rebate stop for the passive leaf, the strike box for insertion of the rod, Nr. 3 screws and Nr. 3 plugs.To be used in place of the nylon floor catch for doors that usually remain open and where carts and heavy equip-ment pass on a regular basis.

FF REBATE SEALING

FF sealing in black extruded profile to be pressed into the dedicated groove in the perimetral frame and on the cen-tral joint of two-leaved doors.

NOTEUpon request sealing supplied for single one-leaved or two-leaved doors to be cut and mounted on site.

1450

3551

26

18

22

75

PRO

GET

m

ult

ipu

rpo

seDoors without lower thresholdVertical cross section

Door

fram

e op

enin

g =

FM

H -4

0

Wal

l ope

ning

FM

H

Exte

rior d

oorfr

ame

= F

M H

+30

FFL

+15

+5

Door cross sections - MeasurementsPROGET multipurpose doors




Wall opening FM L +20+10





Wall opening FM L = L1 + L2

L1L2+20+10



+20+10 , FM H


make it easier to fill the gap between the wall and the doorframe with cement mortar.For dry wall installation, the holes must be precise and greater toleran-ce ranges should not be employed.


76

PRO

GET

m

ult

ipu

rpo

se

FM L = from 500 to 1035 x FM H = from 1750 to 2200

NOTEFor proper installation, the cuts for the anchors should be 80 x 200 mm in size.

Standard installation methodPROGET multipurpose doors

INSTALLATION WITH ANCHORS FOR MORTAR FIXING

For mortar fixing, appropriate cuts for the anchors will need to be created in the walls (section 80 x 200 mm) or fixed with plugs. For fixing with screws the anchors should be used as spacers and fixed with expansion screws. For best mechanical hold, the space between the doorframe and the masonry should always be filled with concrete mortar or polyurethane foam.

One-leaved doorsFM L = from 500 to 1340 x FM H = from 800 to 1749

-----


----

77

PRO

GET

m

ult

ipu

rpo

se

FM L = from 850 to 2070 x FM H = from 1750 to 2200

5060

80

100

Wall screws available

Standard installation methodPROGET multipurpose doors

Two-leaved doorsFM L = from 850 to 2660 x FM H = from 800 to 1749



For the installation with expansion screws, the anchors serve as spacers and should not be bent. For the best me-chanical hold, the space between the doorframe and the masonry should always be fi lled with concrete mortar or polyurethane foam.

WALL SCREWS

For direct wall installations or installation onto subframes, special expansion screws should be used without plugs. Please see the “door accessories” pages for more details.

78

PRO

GET

m

ult

ipu

rpo

se

Order measurements PROGET multipurpose doors

ORDER MEASUREMENTS

Wall Opening

-----

One-leaved door FM L x FM H PT L x PT H standard dimensions doorframe opening800 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 720 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110900 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 820 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101000 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 920 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101100 x 2050 / 2150 1020 x 2010 / 21101200 x 2050 / 2150 1120 x 2010 / 21101300 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1220 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101340 x 2050 / 2150 1260 x 2010 / 2110


from 500 to 995 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 from 420 to 915 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110


from 500 to 1340 x from 1750 to 2670 from 420 to 1260 x 1710 / 2630

Two-leaved doors FM L (L1+L2) x FM H PT L x PT Hstandard dimensions doorframe opening1150 ( 800 + 350 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1070 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101200 ( 800 + 400 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1120 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101250 ( 800 + 450 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1170 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101250 ( 900 + 350 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1170 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101300 ( 900 + 400 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1220 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101350 ( 900 + 450 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1270 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101350 (1000 + 350 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1270 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101400 (1000 + 400 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1320 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101450 (1000 + 450 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1370 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101600 ( 800 + 800 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1520 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101700 ( 900 + 800 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1620 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101800 ( 900 + 900 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1720 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101800 (1000 + 800 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1720 x 1960 / 2010 / 21101900 (1000 + 900 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1820 x 1960 / 2010 / 21102000 (1000 + 1000) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1920 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110


from 890 (540+ 350) to 2000 (1000 + 1000) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 from 810 to 1920 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110


from 850 (500 + 350) to 2660 (1330 + 1330) x from 1750 to 2670 from 770 to 2580 x from 1710 to 2630

NOTEBuyers should be aware that pursuant to and in accordance with Leg-

Doorframe opening

19.03.1996 Nr. 242, all doors that are used as emergency routes or exits must have a minimum height of 2000 mm (= nominal wall opening 2040 mm). Doors that are wider than they are tall are not permitted.

79

PRO

GET

m

ult

ipu

rpo

se

Opening measurements - EncumbrancesPROGET multipurpose doors

islative Decree dd. 19.09.1994 Nr. 626, resp. of Legislative Decree dd. OPENING MEASUREMENTS AND ENCUMBRANCE WITH 90 DEGREE OPENING


-----

Net passage calculationpanic bar type protrusion one-leaved door two-leaved door EXUS 125 FM L- 245 FM L- 410TWIST 100 FM L- 220 FM L- 360SLASH 75 FM L- 195 FM L- 310TOUCHBAR 74 FM L- 194 FM L- 308z = leaf protrusion relative to the wall FM L+ 27 L1 + 35, L2+75


One-leaved door x = FM L - 7h handle = 1050

NOTEThe 90 or 180 degree opening of the leaf may be compromised if han-dle or door closer protrusions come into contact with the wall.

PROGET MULTIPURPOSE - GENERAL NOTESAll rights reserved. No reproduction (partial or total) without prior authorization by Ninz. Ninz reserves the right to modify the product. Installation should be


Two-leaved door x = L1 + 1 y = L2 + 42 b = 130h handle = 1050

executed by qualified technicians. Modifications may only be made as indicated in the installation instructions. Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.

“the ideal finish for every type of surrounding”

We reserve the right to make unannounced technical changes to the contents of this brochure.

Painting and NDD® decorationsfor metal doors

PAINTING 82 - 83

NDD® - NINZ DIGITAL DECOR 84

DECORATION GROUPS 85

FEATURES 86

EXAMPLES 87

STANDARD COLORS WITH NO PRICE SUPPLEMENT

Paint for interior use (group 01) with turquoise pastel colored epoxy-polyester powders - lighter tone for the leaf (NCS4020-B50G) and darker for the frame (NCS5020-B50G). The tonalities of the frame and the door leaf are represented on the photo to the right.

SPECIAL COLORS WITH PRICE SUPPLEMENT

Paint for interior use (groups 02 and 03) available in a va-riety of RAL colors with epoxy-polyester powders. Doors must be protected from atmospheric agents. Sunlight fades the colors.

Distinct from other RAL tints, metallic tinted paints RAL 9006, RAL 9007 (group 3) and RAL 9006 E (group 04) present a fi nish with a wrinkled structure that requires pre-approval of a sample.

Group 02:

RAL 1013

RAL 1015

RAL 5010

RAL 5024

RAL 6000

RAL 7016

RAL 7024

RAL 7035

RAL 7038

RAL 8011

RAL 9001

RAL 9002

RAL 9010

RAL 9011

RAL 9016

RAL 9018

Group 03:

RAL 1001

RAL 1003

RAL 3000

RAL 3003

RAL 3020

RAL 5012

RAL 5015

RAL 6005

RAL 7001

RAL 7004

RAL 7011

RAL 7030

RAL 7032

RAL 7037

RAL 7040

RAL 7042

RAL 7047

RAL 8017

RAL 8019

RAL 9005

RAL 9006*

RAL 9007*

*requires preapproval of a sample.

PaintingFor NINZ doors

PaintingThis standard door is painted with thermoset powders, anti-scratch orange skin and semi-glossy fi nish (except for certain colors). The paint is particularly resistant and offers a pleasant fi nish for interior applications. Choose from a wide range of RAL colors.

82

PAIN

TIN

G

PaintingFor NINZ doors

SPECIAL COLORS FOR EXTERIOR USE WITH PRICE SUPPLEMENTS

Paint for exterior use (group 04) with polyester powders in various RAL tints.

SPECIAL COLORS BY REQUEST WITH PRICE SUPPLEMENTS

Paint available for interior and exterior use (group 05) with epoxy-polyester and polyester (respectively) pow-ders in the requested RAL tints. Group 05 does not include special colors, such as metallic, mica, smooth or wrinkled texture and other sample tints like Pantone, NCS, etc.

CleaningWater and neutral soap are recommended for the regu-lar cleaning of our products. Do not use common clean-ing products (see detergents) and/or other solvents. We shall not be held responsible for any problems that arise if these guidelines are not respected.

Re-painting-- For re-painting, use the following procedure:-- sand and carefully wipe away any dust from the surfaces-- apply a base layer of opaque 2-component epoxide - we

recommend EPOX product Nr. 5203 beige 0059 (made by ALCEA, in Milan)-- repaint the surfaces with your choice of lacquers or paints.

WARNING!Application to exterior doors requires for the adoption of various measures for preventing product degradation, such as: 1. The door should always be protected from bad weather. The door can be permanently damaged if water seeps inside the door leaf. Provide canopies or roofi ng to protect newly installed and existing products.2. Avoid choosing darker colors when the doors will be exposed to direct sunlight. The sheet metal can heat up and cause warping of the door leaf that may compromise the functionality of the door itself.

An artifact of the printing process is that the colors depicted here may not correspond exactly to the colors of actual doors. Please see the RAL or NCS samples.

Group 04:

RAL 1013E

RAL 3000E

RAL 5010E

RAL 6005E

RAL 7016E

RAL 7024E

RAL 7035E

RAL 9002E

RAL 9006E*

RAL 9010E

NCS 4020E

NCS 5020E

*requires preapproval of a sample.

Group 05:

Colors by request only

RetouchingOn request, the Ninz company also provides touch-up paint (nitro/synthetic) in 0,25 or 1,00 kg cans in the neces-sary RAL tint.

ProtectionSince the doors have been designed for normal interior use, they should always be protected from atmospheric agents and direct sunlight. Exterior uses require paints that are specially designed for this kind of application (see groups 04, 05).

83

PAIN

TIN

G

NDD® - Ninz Digital DecorDigital printing for NINZ doors

DESCRIPTION

NDD - Ninz Digital Decor decorative painting.Graphic illustrations are applied directly to the fl at sur-faces of the door leaf after it has been painted with a base coat of polymerized powders. Painting with high-resolu-tion digital print using special ink jets. The application of an additional layer of transparent coating ensures optimal protection of the decorative paint.Decorative NDD painting is available for the entire range of one- and two-leaved Rever, Univer and Proget doors.

awarded with the

Laboratory testing executed on NDD® samples result

500 h exposure test in salt fog good performance, no sign of deterioration encountered

500 h humidity resistance test good performance, no deterioration or loss of surface shine

500 h UVA radiation resistance test good performance, no deterioration or loss of surface shine

Abrasion resistance test after 1000 cycles the decoration was unaltered

Solvent resistance test good performance, no deterioration in the decoration or the background paint

NDD® - Ninz Digital Decor introduces style and design to metal door products. Ninz doors can be directly printed with either your company’s logo or designs, materials and sym-bols selected from a wide variety of NDD®, or also with your preferred artwork or customized images. NDD® introduces innovations to doors as an architectural entity; introducing NDD® can create added value on socio-cultural, economic and emotional dimensions.

The www.ninz.it website illustrates an infinity of continu-ously updated decorations that have been categorized into eight groups for rapid review. The groups are listed on the next page.

Ninz Digital DecorNDD provides clients with an infi nite number of graphic possibilities applicable to the surfaces of NINZ doors.

84

ND

D®

ARTLINE This group includes a wide selection of famous artworks drawn from ancient history up to the present day. These extraordinary designs endow the environment with a special atmosphere as an expression of style.

FANTASY NDD is a data bank of exclusive NINZ images and creations.

REFINEMENTS Contains an infinite number of NDD dec-orations and textures created on customer request and available and useable for a diverse variety of applications.

PHOTOGRAPHS This group contains original photos of country sides, objects, animals, environments, etc., with the appropriate foto resolution.

WOOD This set includes an endless variety of realistic imi-tations of classic, exotic, special and colored types of wood.

STONES This selection includes an endless variety of real-istic imitations of marbles, granites and other stones.

PUBLICITY Transforms Ninz doors into a publicity tool for the company and its products. Printing of the logo in-tegrates the door into the company image. A variety of actual applications are reported here.

SYMBOLS Given the particular importance of this group, a special department has been created for workplace safe-ty symbols, room description/labeling symbols, the simple numbering of rooms, etc.

NDD® - Decoration groups - www.ninz.itDigital printing for NINZ doors

85

ND

D®

NDD® - SpecificationsDigital prints for NINZ doors

WOODEN CRATE PACKAGING

The particularity and prestige of NDD decorations requires a special protection of the doors by packaging them in special wooden crates with an additional layer of external nylon wrapping. At the time of ordering, therefore, the additional cost for the wooden crate must be taken into consideration. Customers who opt for standard packaging on pallets must assume full responsibility in case of dam-age to the product.

DECORATIONS FROM OUR DATABASE

Doors with decorative NDD painting are supplied with:

-- doorframes in the proposed color-- door leaf rebate in the base color of the leaf itself-- hinges in the frame color-- accessories of the type and finishing according to the Ninz

door price lists and brochures-- decoration covering the window frame and/or the central

upright, requitre that these are covered with NDD decorat-ed sheet metal

SPECIAL DECORATIONS

New codes and pricing are required for customized deco-rations and decorations that employ colors not listed in this brochure. In such cases, customers may also be asked to indicate where logos and symbols should be positioned on the door leaf, via the following forms of support:

-- PC-GENERATED FILE (logos, symbols, designs, etc.) in spe-cialized “Illustrator” or “Freehand” format. Submit the file by e-mail or on a CD/DVD-ROM.-- DIAPOSITIVE with a 36 mm or 6 x 6 image of the picture uploaded to a PC using a scanner (professional scanner required). Submit the file (TIF, PDF or JPG format) in maximum resolution on CD/DVD-ROM.-- PHOTOGRAPHIC IMAGE made with a digital camera. Sub-mit the file (TIF, PDF or JPG format) in maximum resolu-tion on CD/DVD-ROM.

PROTECTION FOR EXTERIORS

The exterior installation of NDD doors requires specific treatments for preventing the decorations from deterio-rating over time. The cost supplement covers all door leaf surfaces except for the leaf rebate.

86

ND

D®

EXAMPLE APPLICATIONS IN TYPICAL SURROUNDINGS

Airports - Train stations

Commercial businesses

Sport centers – Stadiums

Logistic centers

Hotels – Residences

Museums – Historical buildings

Hospitals – Nursing homes

Parking lots

Schools - Universities

Offices

NDD® - Example applicationsIn different environments

87

ND

D®

“quality accessories distinguish the door”

Optional accessories for NINZ doors

HANDLES 90 - 92

CYLINDERS 93 - 95

DOOR CLOSERS, CLOSING REGULATORS 96 - 99

SEALINGS - KICK PLATES, DRIP PROFILES - SUBFRAMES 100 - 101

ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS 102 - 103

ELECTRIC HANDLE 104 - 105

ELECTROMAGNETS, COMMANDS 106 - 107

DOOR-HOLDING SYSTEMS 108 - 109

All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced technical changes to the contents of this brochure.

Black Nylon handlesStandard for REVER - UNIVER - PROGET doors

DOOR HANDLES

By default Rever, Univer and Proget doors include safety levers coupled with long backplates with cylinder holes. Each handle set includes a patent key insert, a 9 x 9 square spindle, fastener screws and spacers.M1 handles are fi re rated consisting of a metal core inside the lever and a galvanized steel cover plate to protect the cylinder hole.The M1 handles have been certifi ed in accordance with DIN 18273:1997-12.

M1 HANDLE

Fire rated Univer and Proget doors are equipped by de-fault with M1-type handles.The M1 handle package includes: a pair of black nylon lever with metal cores and galvanized steel installation plates, a pair of black nylon backplates with patent-type cylinder hole adaptable for installment of Euro profi le cyl-inders, a 125 mm long 9 x 9 square spindle, fastener screws and spacers. The package includes also the hexagonal key for setting of the hinges and fastening of the spring screw.

Version description functioning use

M1 handle/handle combination with cylinder hole on both sides. To be combined with locks with an inter-axis distance of 72 mm (015)

door opening by handle or key from both sides

applications in which both door opening directions are accessible without key

M1R HANDLE

The multi-purpose Univer and Proget doors are equipped with M1R-type handles.The M1R handle package includes: a pair of black nylon lever handles, a pair of black nylon backplates with pat-ent-type cylinder holes adaptable for installment of Euro profi le cylinders, a 125 mm long 9 x 9 square spindle, fas-tener screws and spacers.

Version description functioning use

M1R handle/handle combination with cylinder hole on both sides. To be combined with locks with an inter-axis distance of 72 mm (015)


applications in which both door opening directions are accessible without key

NOTEHandles are considered to be accessories and are not pre-assembled. Cylinders need to be ordered separately (except for Secur handles).

67 16

6

23 124

72

Ø20

M1 NYLON 6 Handle

M1.R NYLON 6 Handle

180

71

72

Ø20

23 118

90

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

Special black Nylon handlesFor locks with an inter-axis distance of 72 mm

SPECIAL HANDLES

Rever, Univer and Proget doors may be equipped on re-quest with handles with special functions other than those provided by standard handles.

Versions description functioning use

M2 handle/ doorknob combina-tion with cylinder hole on both sides. To be combined with locks with an inter-axis distance of 72 mm (015)

the doorknob side requires the key for opening

applications in which only one of the door opening directions is accessible with a key

M4 doorknob/ doorknob combi-nation with cylinder hole on both sides For combination with locks with an inter-axis distance of 72 mm (015)

both sides require the key for opening. The doorknobs serve for pushing or pulling the door

applications in which both door opening directions are accessible by key only

M5 plate/plate combination with cylinder hole on both sides. For combination with locks with an inter-axis distance of 72 mm (015)

both sides require the key for opening

applications in technical rooms with doors that usually remain closed and require keys for opening

M9 doorknob/plate combination with cylinder hole on both sides. For combination with locks with an inter-axis distance of 72 mm (015)

both sides require the key for ope-ning The doorknob serves for pulling the door

applications in which both door opening directions are accessible by key only

M11 handle/ handle combination without cylinder hole. For combination with locks with an inter-axis distance of 72 mm (015)

opening is possible at any time using the handle

applications in which the door never needs to be locked

M20 handle/handle and doorknob combination for interior closure. For combination with locks with star-shaped spindles only (Stel 15)

closure using thumbturn latch from inside. Emergency opening from outside with screwdriver

typical closure for bathroom doors

NOTEModels M2, M4, M5, M9 and M20 cannot be combined with the three-point locking mechanism.Handles are considered to be accessories and assembly is required. Cylinders need to be ordered separately.

91

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

Colored handles - Stainless steel handlesFor locks with an inter-axis distance of 72 mm

COLORED DOOR HANDLES

On request, painted resin handles can be provided which match or provide better contrast with the base color of the door. M1C and M2C handles are fi re rated like the M1 han-dle, and have also been certifi ed in accordance with DIN 18273:1997-12.The M1C and M2C handles package consist of: one pair of lever handles (M1C) or the handle/ doorknob combination (M2C) made of polypropylene (PP) with a metal core and galvanized steel installation plate, a pair of polypropylene (PP) backplates with a Euro profi le cylinder hole, a 125 mm long 9 x 9 square spindle, fastener screws and spacers.


M1C handle/handle combination with cylinder hole on both sides. For combination with locks with an inter-axis distance of 72 mm (015)


applications in which both door opening directions are accessible without a key

M2C handle/doorknob combina-tion with cylinder hole on both sides. For combination with locks with an inter-axis distance of 72 mm (015)


applications in which only one of the door opening directions works with a key

STAINLESS STEEL DOOR HANDLES

On request, satin-fi nished stainless steel AISI 304 levers and backplates can be provided which endow the prod-uct with a higher quality while at the same time ensuring optimal corrosion resistance and a noteworthy robustness of the entire set.In addition, M1X and M2X handles are equipped with a return spring that maintains perfect alignment with the geometry of the door. They are mounted on a galvanized steel mechanism and are supplied with a 125 mm long 9 x 9 square spindle, fas-tener screws and spacers.


M1X handle/handle combination with cylinder hole on both sides. For combination with locks with an inter-axis distance of 72 mm (015)


applications in which both door ope-ning directions are accessible without a key

M2X handle/doorknob combina-tion with cylinder hole on both sides. For combination with locks with an inter-axis distance of 72 mm (015)


sostituire con „applications in which only one of the door opening directions works with a key

NOTEThe M2C and M2X models are not combinable with the 3 point locking mechanism. Handles are considered as accessories and require assem-bly. Cylinders need to be ordered separately.

M1C colored RAL1023

Colors available:

RAL 1023

RAL 7016

RAL 7035

RAL 9006*

RAL 9010

*light aluminum

72Ø20

75166

23 127

M1 INOX handle

72

Ø20

75166

23 127

92

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

CylindersFor REVER - UNIVER - PROGET doors

CYLINDERS

On request Rever, Univer and Proget doors with standard locks (Std 015) or three-point locking mechanisms (3vie PRO) may be supplied with a Euro profi le cylinder with three keys.They may also be provided in unique coding or group coded versions, or in combination with unique or group mastering.

Cylinders to pass

L L

Double nickel-plated cylinder equipped with 3 keys

Versions available

standard cylindersingle coded cylindergroup coded cylindersample key coded cylindersingle mastered cylindergroup mastered cylinder

ATTENTIONIt is important to specify MAC lock combinations in the order.

Cylinders to pass for thumbturn latch

Double nickel-plated cylinder with chrome-plated thumb-turn latch equipped with 3 keys

Versions available

standard cylinder with thumbturn latchmastered cylinder with thumbturn latchmastered and emergency cylinder with thumbturn latch

NOTECylinders are considered to be accessories and assembly is required.Cylinders to be combined with locks of NINZ doors must meet DIN 18254 standards.Main, master and/or emergency key (or keys) should be ordered sepa-rately - they are not included with the cylinder.

Lengths available for door leaf thickness40/40 60 mm35/35 50 mm30/30 40 mm


93

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

CylindersFor REVER - UNIVER - PROGET doors

CYLINDERS FOR COMBINATION WITH PANIC BARS AND EMERGENCY HANDLES

Standard panic bars and emergency handles are supplied with a Euro profi le cylinder with three keys.Cylinders with single coding, grouped coding or in combi-nation with single or grouped mastering.

Cylinders not to pass

Half nickel-plated cylinder equipped with 3 keys

Versions available

standard half cylindersingle coded half cylindergroup coded half cylindersample key coded half cylinder single mastered half cylindergroup mastered half cylinder

ATTENTIONIt is important to specify MAC lock combinations in the order.

Cylinders to pass in combination with EXUS DC panic bars

L L

Double nickel-plated cylinder equipped with 3 keys.

Versions available

standard cylindersingle coded cylindergroup coded cylindersample key coded cylinder single mastered cylindergroup mastered cylinder

NOTECylinders are considered to be accessories and assembly is required.Cylinders to be combined with the locks of NINZ doors must meet DIN 18254 standards.Main, master and/or emergency key (or keys) should be ordered sepa-rately - they are not included with the cylinder.



94

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

Cylinders, KeysFor REVER - UNIVER - PROGET doors

CONFIGURED AS NEEDED!

NINZ asks its partners to specify the system in the form of a key plan which, when prepared with care, serves as a map for optimizing the required intervention times (from order to installation) while ensuring that the mastering system meets the specifi c needs being requested.

Here are a few of the configurations that are available:

1) StandardCylinders with different keys.

2) Single codedCylinders with the same keys.

3) Grouped codedCylinders from the same group are coded alike.

4) Main/master key systemsGrouped master key system in which each cylinder can be opened with its own key or with a master key that can open cylinders from one group but not others; a general master key can open all cylinders from all different groups.Standard cylinders closed from the interior with a thumb-turn latch cannot be opened with the main/master key.

5) Frictioned emergency“Frictioned cylinder” means that the main or master key can only open doors that have not been closed from in-side, while the same doors can still be opened with the emergency key.

6) Encrypted cylinder with sample keySample key coding allows for cylinders to be coded on the basis of a sample key supplied by the customer.

KEYS

The order should specify the number of keys to be sup-plied with the mastered cylinders.

Versions available

normal key opens the single door only

main key opens all doors from the same group

master key opens all the doors that have grouped mastering

emergency key opens all doorsKey

master key opens all the doors

main keys open groups of doors

Key plan example for master key systems.

95

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

Door closerFor REVER - UNIVER - PROGET doors

DOOR CLOSER

The door closer regulates the closure of the door so that the door leaf returns properly to its final closed position after being released.

Regulation is influenced by closure force, speed and the final impact.Although Univer and Proget doors are equipped with spring hinges for automatic closure, the installation of door closers is recommended for wide and/or heavy doors and/or in the presence of windows on the leaf.The door closer product is addressed by EU directive 89/106/CEE, which means it is subject to marking.

CP1 with scissor arm marked in conformity with EN 1154.

Rever, Univer and Proget doors are available, on request, with an overhead CP1 door closer with a silver-colored scissor arm.The CP1 can be used for fire rated doors and is classified for 180° closure with a force varying from 3 to 4.Proget doors ordered with CP1 are provided with pre-drilled installation holes on the door leaf and the frame. Standard Rever, Univer and Proget doors include internal reinforcements for the CP1 application.

51 51

CP1 UNIVER CP1 PROGET

CP2 with slide channel marked in conformity with EN 1154.

On request Rever, Univer and Proget doors are available with an overhead CP2 door closer with slide channel. Rela-tive to the CP1, the advantage of this system is the ab-sence of a protruding arm.The CP2 is suited for use on fire rated doors and has been classified for 180° closure with force level 4.Proget doors ordered with CP2 are provided with pre-drilled installation holes on the door leaf and the frame. Standard Rever, Univer and Proget doors include internal reinforcements for the CP2 application.

52

5

52

CP2 UNIVER CP2 PROGET

6

51

Optional colors:

RAL dark bronze

RAL 9016

RAL 9005

NOTEArm protrusion = 290 mm

CP1 REVER

52

8

Optional colors:

RAL dark bronze

RAL 9016

RAL 9005

CP2 REVER

96

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

Door closersFor UNIVER - PROGET doors

CP2-EMF with slide channel and electro-mechanical hold open device

marked in conformity with EN 1154 and EN 1155.The CP2–EMF differs from the CP2 in that it has an electro-mechanical hold-open device that allows the door leaf to be locked at an angle ranging from 80° to 120°. During alarms or power outages, the hold-open device is unlocked and the door is closed by the door closer.The CP2-EMF can be used on fi re doors and has a maximum opening range of 120°, with a closing force set at 4.Proget doors ordered with CP2-EMF are provided with pre-drilled installation holes on the door leaf and the frame. Standard Univer doors include internal reinforcements for the CP2-EMF application.

52

17

52

10

CP2 EMF UNIVER CP2 EMF PROGET

maximum opening in the absence of obstaclesModel one-leaved door active leaf secondary leaf power supply absorption EC certification standard

CP1 180° 180° 180° - - 0432-BPR-0054 EN 1154CP2 180° 180° 180° - - 0432-BPR-0051 EN 1154

CP2 EMF 120° 120° 120° 24 Vcc 58,3 mA 0432-BPR-00510432-BPR-0025

EN 1154 EN 1155

Optional colors:

RAL dark bronze

RAL 9016

RAL 9005

97

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

Closing regulatorsFor UNIVER - PROGET fi re doors

CLOSING REGULATOR

Closing regulators administer the closure of two-leaved doors so that the secondary leaf is overlaid on the active leaf upon fi nal closure. This is why it is mandatory to apply closing regulators to all two-leaved fi re doors.

There are two systems for applying it to the door: - separated from the self-closing system of the spring hinge or the door closer

- incorporated into the closure system of the door closerClosing regulators are addressed by EU directive 89/106/CEE, which means they are subject to marking.

RC/STD marked in conformity with EN 1158.

The RC/STD closing regulator device is distinct from the door closer and is a standard element of all Univer and Proget two-leaved fi re doors.In Proget doors the closing regulator is inserted into the upper horizontal groove of the frame, while in Univer doors it is supplied separately with an anchoring rod to be installed on site. In comparison with other regulators which are separate from the door closer, the advantage of the RC/STD regulator is that it is not visible when the door is closed.The RC/STD regulator is suited for use on fi re doors and is classifi ed for forces ranging from 3 to 5.

UNIVER PROGET

RC2 system marked in conformity with EN 1154 and EN 1158.

On request, two-leaved Univer and Proget doors are avail-able with an RC2 regulator in place of the RC/STD.The RC2 closing regulator system is incorporated into the door closer, and consists of 2 CP2 with force EN 4 with a slide channel and a regulator integrated in the upper slid-ing guide. The entire system is silver colored.

The RC2 system presents clear advantages: - no protruding door-closer arms - regulator concealed in the upper guide (even when the door is open)

- controlled closure of both leavesThe RC2 regulator is suited for use on fi re doors and is classifi ed for both door closers with force EN4.Minimum wall opening width of 1200 mm and minimum of 370 mm for the secondary leaf.Proget doors ordered with RC2 are provided with pre-drilled holes for the installation of 2 CP2 door closers on the leaves and the slide channel on the frame. The instal-lation holes in Univer doors need to be drilled on site for anchoring to the internal reinforcement of the leaves.

.

52

17

52

10

RC2 UNIVER RC2 PROGET

Optional colors:

RAL dark bronze

RAL 9016

RAL 9005

98

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

Closing regulatorsFor UNIVER - PROGET fi re doors

RC2–EMF1 SYSTEM marked in conformity with EN 1154, EN 1158 and EN 1155.

The RC2–EMF1 system differs from the RC2 in that it has an electro-mechanical hold-open device that allows the door leaf to be locked at an angle ranging from approx. 80° to 130°. The active leaf is held open by the closing regu-lator system. During alarms or power outages, the hold-open system is unlocked and the door is closed by the door closer. The entire system is provided in the standard silver color.

The RC2-EMF1 system presents multiple advantages: - possibility of holding the leaves open in the desired position - no visible magnets - no protruding door closer arms - regulator concealed in the upper guide (even when the

door is open) - controlled closure of both leaves

The RC2-EMF1 system is suited for use on fi re rated doors and is classifi ed for both door closers with force level EN4.Minimum wall opening width of 1200 mm and minimum of 370 mm for the secondary leaf.Proget doors ordered with RC2-EMF1 are provided with pre-drilled installation holes on the door leaf and the frame. The Univer door series includes internal reinforce-ments for application of the two door closers.

maximum opening in the absence of obstaclesModel active leaf secondary leaf power supply absorption EC certification standard

RC/STD 180° 180° - - 0425-ICIM-1153 EN 1158

RC2 180° 180° - - 0432-BPR-00510432-BPR-0026

EN 1154EN 1158

RC2-EMF1 180° 130° 24 Vcc 58,3 mA0432-BPR-00510432-BPR-00250432-BPR-0026

EN 1154EN 1155EN 1158

.

5217

52

10

RC2-EMF1 UNIVER RC2-EMF1 PROGET

Optional colors:

RAL dark bronze

RAL 9016

RAL 9005

99

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

Door sweep - Protection platesFor UNIVER - PROGET doors

AUTOMATIC DOOR SWEEP

On request, Univer and Proget doors are available with an automatic door sweep to prevent air drafts from entering through the crack between the leaf and the fl oor.It complements the FF sealing applied to the frame to pro-vide better acoustic insulation and better air sealing for the door.It is applied on the push side by using screws to attach it directly to the sheet metal of the door, after which the mechanism is completely covered with an anodized alu-minum profi le. On request, it can also be provided in the same color as the door leaf.It is applied on site following door installation so that it can be adjusted to the actual leaf height.

Lengths avail. FM L active leaf FM L secondary leaf 430 mm from 500 to 520 from 407 to 506 530 mm from 521 to 620 from 507 to 606 630 mm from 621 to 720 from 607 to 706 730 mm from 721 to 820 from 707 to 806 830 mm from 821 to 920 from 807 to 906 930 mm from 921 to 1020 from 907 to 10061030 mm from 1021 to 1120 from 1007 to 11061130 mm from 1121 to 1220 from 1107 to 12061230 mm from 1221 to 1320 from 1207 to 13061330 mm from 1321 to 1340 from 1307 to 1330

PROTECTIVE PLATES AND KICKPLATES

On request for 1 and 2 leaf Univer and Proget doors, speci-fying the side of application (pull or push).Their main function is to protect the parts of the door that are vulnerable to being scraped by carts, hospital beds, etc.They are made of AISI 304 satinized stainless steel sheet metal with a standard height of 230 mm.For on-site attachment with two-sided adhesive factory applied on the back, at the bottom of the door (kick plate) or at handle height (protective plate).

230

Protection plates

230

Kick plates

15 Pushside

37

Holes are factory prepared for the passage of the handle panel and cylinder.

Holes are factory prepared for the passage of the handle panel and

cylinder.

100

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

Drip-steel profi le - Wall screws - SubframeFor NINZ doors

DRIP-STEEL PROFILE

On request for Univer and Proget doors. Normally used to prevent condensation from dripping down the door leaf and puddling beneath the door. The profi le is made of “Sendzimir” processed galvanized sheet metal painted the color of the door leaf.It is applied to the exterior side of the door on site after be-ing cut to measure, to be attached with the screws provided.

Lengths avail. FM L door leaf

710 mm to 800 810 mm to 900 910 mm to 1000 1260 mm to 1350

WALL SCREWS FOR FASTENING WITHOUT PLUGS

Field of use: installation of Proget REI 60/120 and multipur-pose doorframes to the wall or subframe using screws but no plugs. Designed for installation into concrete, full bricks, half-full bricks, lightened cement and other materials.Advantages: saves time and money thanks to direct attach-ment of the frame to the wall, with no need to enlarge the holes for plugs. Thanks to the black galvanization, the screws blend in smoothly with the FC sealing.

Dimensions description

Ø 7.5 x 50 mm for attachment to metal subframes

Ø 7.5 x 60 mm for attachment to concrete and especially thick walls

Ø 7.5 x 80 mm for attachment to walls of average thickness

Ø 7.5 x 100 mm for attachment to walls of lower thickness

NOTEHoles should be drilled using a Ø 6 mm stone drill bit.

SUBFRAME

Subframe (to be ordered) in hollow 30 x 15 x 2mm steel profi les (recommended for REI 60 and REI 120 Proget doors) equipped with anchors for mortar fi xing and spac-ers that are to be removed during fi nal installation.

Required wall opening = FM L + 40

Wall opening for the door order FM L

10 10

Horizontal cross section

29

26

5060

80

100

Ope

ning

to c

reat

e =

FM

H +

20

Wal

l ope

ning

for t

he d

oor o

rder

FM

H

10

FFL


101

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

MAC® Multifunctional Access ControlControlled opening system

The MAC system makes it possible to activate the handle to open the door using the same mechanical components as for normal functioning.The particularity of the MAC system is that it concentrates all of the command and control functions in the lock, which simplifi es the electrical work required on site.

The MAC system offers multiple advantages, such as: - possibility of 12 V AC/DC or 24 V AC/DC power supplies,

which avoids problems due to inadequate voltage

- low current absorption: - at 12 V the startup current is 500 mA for the fi rst 5-6 sec.,

before changing to a 250 mA maintenance current - at 24 V the startup current is 1 A for 300 millisecond.,

before settling to 500 mA for 4-5 sec. and fi nally chang-ing to a 250 mA maintenance current for the remaining 25 sec.

- timer incorporated, time set at 30 sec. with automatic reset (zeroing of the timer) every time the door is opened, elimi-nating the need for external timers

- red/green LED on the backplate to prevent useless forcing of the handle by signaling whether the opening system is active or not

- continuous handle activation (always open when desired)

- remote LED for remote signaling of lock activation/deactiva-tion

The MAC system comes pre-assembled with the door, in-cluding the wiring inside the door leaf and the electrical contacts between the leaf and the frame.

Included pre-assembled on the door: anti-panic lock with solenoid and elec-tronic chip with timer incorporated (1), double electrical contacts between leaf and frame (2), internal wiring inside the leaf (3)Included in the package: handle and backplate with red/green LED and con-nectors (4)Not included: power supply for doorframe contacts (5), opening button and command accessories (6)

1 3

5

34 6624

5

2

Diagram of components

Nylon handle with red/green LED Stainless steel handle with red/green

LED

102

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

MAC 1 SYSTEM

Operation modeThe MAC 1 system controls access from the pull side of the door. With the lock locked by key, opening is only possi-ble with electrical consent (button, switch, badge reader, etc.) which activates the handle, while opening is always possible from the push side by means of the panic bar or emergency handle. Activation of the handle is signaled by illumination of the “green LED,” while the “red LED” indi-cates when the handle is idle. Both LEDs are off when no power is being supplied.

Time modeIn this mode, the activation time lasts 30 seconds before the handle is returned to idle. If the door is opened within the 30 seconds, the timer is automatically reset to zero.

Continuous mode“open setting”: in this mode, handle activation is control-led by an electrical switch (not included) that provides continuous power to the MAC 1 lock. The green LED re-mains lighted, being turned off only from the time the door is opened until it is fully closed once again.

MAC 1 can be combined with any BM type panic bar and M3 emergency handles.

EX DC BM EX/TW BM SL BM M3

MAC 2 SYSTEM

Operation modeThe MAC 2 system controls access from both sides of the door. With the lock locked by key, opening is only possible with electrical consent (button, switch, badge reader, etc.) which activates both handles. Activation of both handles is signaled by illumination of the “green LED,” with the “red LED” signaling when the handles are idle. Both LEDs are off when no power is being supplied.

Time modeIn this mode, the activation time lasts 30 seconds before both handles are returned to idle. If the door is opened within the 30 seconds, the timer is automatically reset to zero.

Continuous mode“open setting”: in this mode, the activation of both han-dles is controlled by an electrical switch (not included) that provides continuous power to the MAC 2 lock. The green LED remains lighted for both handles, being turned off only from the time the door is opened until it is fully closed once again.

MAC 2 can be combined with M1 (black nylon) and M1X (stainless steel) handles.

NOTEBoth systems have been REI 120 fire-tested to ensure compliance of the certified product

MAC® Multifunctional Access ControlControlled opening system

103

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

Electric handleControlled opening system

ELM/MT MULTI-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC HANDLE

Controlled door opening system that employs an elec-tronic device to activate the handle. The latter is equipped with an internal timer with a 30 seconds time allowance for opening the door, after which the electric handle is deactivated. The handle can be activated for longer time periods by means of the electrical switch.The illumination of a green LED and sounding of an acous-tic signal (buzzer) indicate handle activation, while a red LED indicates deactivation.

When ordered together with the door, the ELM/mt system includes:electric handle, electrical contacts between the leaf and the frame, power cable inside the door connected to elec-trical contacts, command panel, lock and fi xing screws.

If ordered separately from the door, the system includes:electric handle, command panel and fi xing screws.

Technical data

power supply 12 Vcc/Vca - 24 Vcc/Vca

current absorbed at 12 V 500 mAcurrent absorbed at 24 V 200 mAstartup current at 12 V 700 mA

startup current at 24 V 300 mA

ELM/CISA MULTI-VOLTAGE CISA ELECTRIC HANDLE

Controlled door opening system that employs an electron-ic device to activate the handle. Equipped with a separate timer (for insertion into the switch box) which can be set for different opening times: from a minimum of 0,1 second to a maximum of 10 days.Equipped with green LED that signal activation of the handle.

The ELM/cisa system includes: electric handles, 2 meters of power cable, cable sleeve for the connection between the leaf and the frame, 8/9 square spindle, fi xing screws, ad-justable timer packaged separately.

Technical data


current absorbed 330 mA

startup current 800 mA

operational temperature -20°C ÷ +80°C

max. relative ambient humidity 95%

NOTE The electric handle requires assembly.

225

19 125

72

82

Ø20

3338

75

72

190

141.5

257

104

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

Electric handleControlled opening system

OPENING SYSTEM FOR COMBINATION WITH ELM/MT ELECTRIC HANDLE

Emergency handles M3Use: one- or two-leaved doors for emergency exits when access control is desired on the pull side.The controlled opening direction is from the pull side of the door (electric handle side). Locking the lock by key blocks the operation of the electric handle, while opening remains possible via the M3 emergency handle.

Emergency handles HOT/CILUse: for the doors of hotel roomsThe controlled opening direction is from the push side of the door (electric handle side). Closing with the thumb-turn latch from inside the room, the opening by electric handle is possible only with an electric consent. Opening is always possible from the room side of the door.

MSC MCC/S

M3 HOT-CIL

OPENING SYSTEM FOR COMBINATION WITH ELM/MT OR ELM/CISA ELECTRIC HANDLE

Panic barsThe controlled opening direction is from the pull side of the door (electric handle side). Locking the lock by key blocks the electric handle functioning, while opening is still possible via the panic bar on the push side.Use: one- or two-leaved doors for anti-panic exits when access control is desired on the pull side.

Twist

MSC HandlesUse: one- or two-leaved doors when control is desired for one of the two opening directions. Locking with the key blocks opening in both directions. Controlled opening may be for either the push or pull direction, depending on where the electric handle is ap-plied.

MCC/S HandlesUse: for one- or two-leaved doors where access is to be controlled from the pull side only (electric handle side). Locking with the key blocks opening from the push side, but not from the side where the electric handle is applied.

Exus

Slash

105

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

Electromagnet Controlled opening system

ELECTROMAGNETS 13700 TD

This system is for use in special situations when the doors remain closed and should only be opened with electrical consent. The electrically powered electromagnet holds the door closed with a holding force of approximately 300 kg, rendering the action of the handle ineffective. Only electrical commands (badge reader, key button, etc.) or electrical consent from the fi re detector system can deac-tivate the electromagnet making a door opening possible.

Operation modeThe door is held closed by the electromagnet (01) and the bolt of the lock. Opening from the outside can happen via magnetic card (04) using the Badge reader (02) of the card control system or any other system of choice and by retract-ing the bolt using the handle or key.From the inside, the deactivation of the electromagnet is caused by the unlock button (03) (also remotely) or with the same system used for the pull side, while the locking bolt must still be retracted using the handle or key. The activated electromagnet signals its state with a red LED, whereas the green LED signals the temporary deactivation. Further a relay AC/DC signaling the electromagnetic state is supplied.

Technical data

model 13700 TD withstand force fi no a 300 Kg.

power supply 12/24 Vcc time delay 0 ÷ 90 sec.

current absorbed at 12 V 500 mA electrom. compatib standard EMC - UNI CEI 70011

current absorbed at 24 V 250 mA certifi cate Nr. 0123/02

COMPONENTS INCLUDED WITH THE ELECTROMAGNET CONTROLLED OPENING SYSTEM

For Proget doorsElectromagnet 13700 TD holding force 300 kg, 12/24 V DC, fastener plate, anchor with stainless steel fastener back-plate.

For Rever/Univer doorsElectromagnet 13700 TD withstanding force 300 kg, 12/24 V DC, fastener plate and angle bar, anchor with stainless steel fastener backplate.

Control system: - “Access” code keypad - Card-based control system - Biometric “TOCA access” reader - Unlock button

NOTEDetailed specifi cations for the Control system are found on the “Com-mand accessories” page.

02

01

03

04

NOTE Unlocking of the door is only possible if the door is not locked by key.

PROGET Electromagnet REVER/ UNIVER Electromagnet

106

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

Power supply/command accessoriesFor MAC® - ELM/mt - ELM/cisa Electromagnet 13700 TD controlled opening systems

CONTROL SYSTEMS AND RELATED ACCESSORIES

“Access” code keypadPower supply 12-18 V AC/V DC with 10 numeric buttons plus an Enter key, including control unit for 1 door and timer incorporated (0,5÷25 sec.). Up to 500 recordable different codes, composed from 1 to 6 digits.

Card-based control systemCard control system with timer incorporated (art. 55611 + 55613 + 55615), including Badge reader, control unit, fl at cable, external 230 V DC/15 V DC transformer, three blank badges and a coded badge.

„TOCA access“ biometric reader„TOCA access“ biometric reader for reading fi ngerprints and transforming them into key codes. Includes an inter-nal unit for registering, memorizing and cancelling users and external unit for fi ngerprints. Autonomous low volt-age 9 V AC power supply.

Unlock buttonUnlock button (art. GW 20 523), with white casing and control light.

Power Supply Switching 12 V DC/3 AWith different management options: - max. Nr. 10 MAC® Multifunction Access Control * - or max. Nr. 5 13700 TD Electromagnets - or max. Nr. 5 ELM/mt Electric handles * - or max. Nr. 8 ELM/cisa Electric handles *

* provided that they are not commanded simultaneously

„Access“ code keypad

Card-based control system

Biometric reader

Unlock button Power Supply Switching 12 V DC/3 A

107

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

Door-holding systemsFor fi re doors and gates

C2 MONO-ZONE MICROPROCESSOR

Certifi ed in accordance with EN 1154-2 and EN 1154-4 standards.The processor was designed and built in conformity with UNI EN 1154 standards, which regulate processors for fi re alarms and related accessories which each must conform with EN1154 standards.

Technical data

model 52002

primary power supply 230 V AC, 100 mA, 50-60Hz

auxiliary power supply 2 batteries, 12 V DC/1,1 ÷ 1,3 Ah

minimum output current 264 mA

maximum output current 424 mA

buffer battery charger output 24 V DC (27.6 V DC)

protection rating IP30


operational zones single zone (mono-zone)

acoustic alarm internal buzzer

"low battery" signal intermittent internal buzzer

EC certifi cation 0051-CPD-0264

conformity with standards EN 1154-2 +A1:2006EN 1154-4:1997 + A1:2002 + A1:2006

ATTENTIONAccording to standard EN 1154-4, it is obligatory for the mono-zone processor to be equipped with:- Nr. 1 heat/smoke detector RFC certif. EN 1154-7- Nr. 1 pair of buffer batteries - Nr. 1 external electronic siren certif. EN 1154-3- Nr. 1 alarm activation button certif. EN 1154/11

RFC HEAT AND SMOKE DETECTOR

Certifi ed in accordance with UNI EN 1154-5 and EN 1154-7 standards.RFC heat and smoke detector characterized by white ABS cas-ing. Optical/thermic operation with intervention temperature to be set between 54 and 65°C. To ensure proper functioning, the detectors must be subjected to regular 6-month mainte-nance checks. Please note that it is inadvisable to position the sensor where strong air currents are present.

Technical data

operational voltage 10 ÷ 30 V DC, typically 24 V DC

consumption at rest, at 24 V DC 70 µA

absorption of alarm at 24 V DC 50 mA

BUFFER BATTERIES

Pair of rechargeable buffer batteries, 12 V DC/1.2 Ah

NOTEAll DOOR-HOLDING SYSTEMS are supplied in separate packaging and require on-site assembly.

150

48

240

This is a control unit which administers the door-holding electromagnets for fi re doors, where standards require consideration of every possible and imponderable event that could happen during normal functioning. The following, therefore, are subject to constant monitoring: all exits towards the smoke and heat detectors, the alarm and reset buttons, the external siren and the charge of the two batteries. The microprocessor itself, which functions as the brain of the system, is constantly monitored at regular intervals by a specifi c system routine that checks for proper functioning of the operational software. Any hitches, breakdowns or malfunctions are signaled by one of the ten LED diodes on the front panel, and the internal buzzer provides an additional acoustic signal for specifi c cases. Alarm or breakdown situations can then be reset at three different levels depending on the seriousness of the event: by a button located near the microprocessor, by a fi rst button on the front of the microprocessor unit and by a second button on the same panel that requires key selector activation (key in possession of the safety manager). A fourth reset level is then supplied for the circuit only (operation executable by authorized technical personnel only).

MANAGES- max. Nr. 5 RFC heat/smoke detectors- max. Nr. 5 alarm activation buttons- max. Nr. 2 electronic sirens- Nr. 4 EM or EMP electromagnets- Nr. 2 buffer batteries

Ø110

54

Technical data


conformity with EN 1154-5, EN 1154-7 standards

108

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

Door-holding systemsFor fi re doors and gates

ELECTRONIC SIREN

Includes a volume control function for installation in inter-nal and external environments. The connection is made us-ing double clamps (6) for branching.

Technical data

power supply 9 ÷ 28 V DCabsorption by alarm at 12 V DC 8 mA

absorption by alarm at 24 V DC 16 mA

protection rating IP65


conformity with standard EN 1154-3

ALARM ACTIVATION BUTTON

Pressure on the plastic front plate activates the electrical contact. Re-arming of the contact is executed manually us-ing a key (provided).

Technical data

power supply max. 30 V DCprotection rating IP41operational temperature max. +65°Cinternal exchange contact n.o./n.c.conformity with standard EN 1154-11

EM ELECTROMAGNET

EM wall electromagnet with white plastic casing, complete with unlock button. Anchor consisting of a nickel-plated plate and a jointed baseboard.

EMP ELECTROMAGNET

EMP fl oor electromagnets, consisting of a galvanized metal core with an unlock button and a fastener plate. Anchor consisting of a nickel-plated plate and jointed baseboard.


In red color ABS with a weight of 110 gr.

Dimensions:99 x 95 x 43mm.

6553

65

35

90

75

Technical data

power supply 24 V DC

absorption 60 mA

minimum withstand force 55 Kg.

EC certification 0407-CPD-011 (IG-098-2004) /02

conformity with standard EN 1155

6553

65

114

70

104

Technical data

power supply 24 V DC

absorption 60 mA

minimum withstand force 55 Kg.

EC certification 0407-CPD-011 (IG-098-2004)

conformity with standard EN 1155

With 28 or 32 selectable to-nes and a second tone for two-phase alarms.

Dimensions:Ø 91 x 91mm.

109

AC

CES

SOR

IES

do

ors

“safety is in your hands“

Emergency exit devices andAnti-panic devices for safety exits

PROVISIONS / STANDARDS 112 - 116

EMERGENCY EXIT DEVICES 117 - 125

EXUS - PRESENTATION, FEATURES, CERTIFICATION 126 - 131

EXUS FOR GLASS DOOR - FEATURES, CERTIFICATION 132 - 133

TWIST - PRESENTATION, FEATURES, CERTIFICATION 134 - 137

SLASH - PRESENTATION, FEATURES, CERTIFICATION 138 - 143

GENERAL INFORMATION - TECH DRAWINGS, VARIATIONS 144 - 149


Provisions/StandardsFor emergency exit devices / Anti-panic devices for safety exits

-- Materials used for anti-panic exit devices must remain operational at temperatures between -10° and + 60°.

-- Verification is required for suitability of use with fire/smoke resistant doors, and this verification may only be received by passing a fire resistance test on both sides of the door in conformity with EN 1634-1.

-- It is extremely important that anti-panic and emergency devices not be used on fire doors that have a higher fire resistance time than the level for which the device itself has been approved.

-- To reduce the risk of entrapping fingers and/or block-ing the device, checks based on visual inspection and measurement with appropriate calipers is prescribed.

-- Protrusions and corners that could cause harm to per-sons must be smoothed down.

-- Anti-panic or emergency exit devices that activate up-per and lower vertical rods (on the passive leaf, for instance) must ensure that manipulation of the lower rod does not activate the upper rod.

-- The strike box mounted on the floor must not rise higher than 15 mm and must be tapered in the direc-tion of the escape route.

-- Periodic lubrication must be possible without requiring disassembly of the device.

-- For door masses greater than 200 kg and leaf dimen-sions greater than 1320 x 2520 mm, additional testing under harsher conditions are required.

-- The durability of the device may be classified as grade 6 (100,000 cycles) or grade 7 (200.000 cycles). For second-ary leaves, grade 6 corresponds to 10,000 cycles, and for grade 7 - 20,000 cycles.

-- The presence of an external door furniture (key, cylin-der, lever handle, doorknob, etc.) must not in any way interfere with the activation of the internal anti-panic or emergency device.

EN 1125:2008 aNd EN 179:2008 STaNdaRdS

New European standards for marked safety exit and emergency exit devices entered into effect on 01 January 2010, replacing the previous EN 1125: 1997 + A1:2001 and EN 179:1997 standards.

Standard EN 1125: 2008 specifies the requirements for man-ufacturing, performance levels and testing of anti-panic exit devices activated mechanically by a horizontal bar and designed for specific use in panic situations along escape routes.Standard EN 179: 2008 specifies the requirements for the manufacturing, performance levels and testing of emergen-cy exit devices activated mechanically by a lever handle or push panel.

conformity of the anti-panic and emergency exit devic-es with the standard requirements must be demonstrated by initial type testing and production controls carried out by the manufacturer under the continuous observation of the certifying body.

Performance and safety requirements

-- Device selection depends on the risk analysis of its use when installed along escape routes or emergency exits.

-- Anti-panic devices are only required to conform with

standard EN 1125, permitting exit at any time by a sin-gle operation on the horizontal bar that requires no prior knowledge of how the device functions and that permits opening even when the door is subjected to a load. These requirements simulate the forces that could be applied by people who are in a state of panic.

-- Standard EN 179 concerns emergency devices desig-nated for use in emergency situations involving peo-ple who are accustomed to using safety exits and their devices, and who are therefore unlikely to be taken by panic.

-- Devices for anti-panic or emergencies must be designed so that the door can be opened from the inside at any time in less than 1 second.

112

dEV

ICES

Provisions/StandardsFor emergency exit devices / Anti-panic devices for safety exits

OFFICIaL GaZETTE OF THE EUROPEaN UNION 04 JULy 2009

Information from member states:Commission communication in the context of the application of Directive 89/106/CEE of the Council in relation to the ap-proach of regulatory and administrative legislative provisions of Member States in regards to construction products.

OEN ( 1 ) Reference and title of the standard

Reference of the substitute standard

CENEN 1125:2008 Lock accessoriesAnti-panic devices for safety exits activated by horizontal bar - Test methods and requirements

EN 1125/1997

CENEN 179:2008 Lock accessoriesEmergency exit devices activated by lever handles or push plates

EN 179/1997

Date of the standard’s entry into effect as a harmonized European standard

Date of expiration of the co-existence period

1.1.2009 1.1.2010

-- External door furnitures other than those provided by the anti-panic device manufacturer is not considered to conform with standards.

-- External door furnitures provided by the manufac-turer may have either manual or electrical operation (e.g., electric handle or lock activated electrically by the handle).

-- The material used to make the device must not contain or release dangerous substances in greater amounts than prescribed by European standards or national regulations.

-- Anti-panic and emergency exit devices must be ac-companied by clear, detailed instructions for instal-lation and maintenance, including a list of all of the elements that have been tested and approved for use of the device and that could be provided separately.

-- It is essential for anti-panic and emergency exit devices to be installed according to the manufacturer’s instruc-tions using duly compatible components only.

-- Horizontal bars and levers must normally be installed at a height range of 900 to 1100 mm above the fin-ished floor level, as measured in the closed position. If it is known that children represent the majority of the rooms’ occupants, a reduction in bar height should be considered.

-- Once the device has been installed, the instructions should be handed over to the user, who must pre-serve them for use during maintenance operations.

-- To ensure that performance conforms with certifica-tions, regular maintenance checks need to be carried out at intervals of one month or less, with periodic checks that all of the system’s components still corre-spond to the component list provided at the outset.

113

dEV

ICES

Provisions/EC markingEmergency exit devices

EC MaRKING aCCORdING TO EN 179:2008

How to read the marking:

EC conformity marking consisting of the “ ” symbol indicated in Directive 93/68/CE

M3 device for emergency exits Product description

Ninz S.p.A. Corso Trento, 2/AI-38061 ALA (TN)/ITALY Name or identifying mark and registered address of the manufacturer

10 Last two digits of the year when the marking was applied

EN 179:2008 Standard number

0425 Identifi cation number for the certifying body

2147-CPD-2010 EC certifi cation number

3 7 7 B 1 4 4 2 A A 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th

Product classifi cation

CLaSSIFICaTION aCCORdING TO EN 179:2008

How to read the classifi cation:

Category of use (1st character)Only one category of use is applicable:- grade 3: very frequent use with little need to pay at-tention, in the sense of the possibility of accidents or im-proper use.

Durability (2nd character)Two different durability ratings are applicable:- grade 6: 100,000 test cycles;- grade 7: 200.000 test cycles.

Mass of the door (3rd character)Three different grades of door mass are applicable:- grade 5: up to 100 kg;- grade 6: up to 200 kg;- grade 7: over 200 kg.

Suitability for use with fire/smoke rated doors (4th character)Three different grades are applicable:- grade 0: non approved for use on fi re/smoke rated doors;- grade A: suitable for use on smoke rated doors;- grade B: suitable for use on fi re/smoke rated doors; on the basis of testing in conformity with EN 1634-1.

Human safety (5th character)Only a single human safety rating is applicable:- grade 1: all devices for panic exits must ensure human safety, so for purposes of the present standard only the maximum rating is allowed.

Corrosion resistance (6th character)The two different corrosion resistance ratings indicated in EN 1670:2007 are applicable:- grade 3: 96 h (high resistance);- grade 4: 240 h (extra-high resistance).

Material safety (7th character)Five different material safety grades are applicable:- grade 2: 1000N- grade 3: 2000N- grade 4: 3000N- grade 5: 5000N

Protrusion of horizontal bar (8° character)Two different grades of device protrusion are applicable:- grade 1: protrusion up to 150 mm (extra protrusion);- grade 2: protrusion up to 100 mm (standard protrusion).

Activation type (9° character)Two activation types are applicable:- type A: emergency exit device with lever handle activation- type B: emergency exit device with push panel activation (SLASH, for example).

Field of door application (10th character)Four different categories of fi eld of door application are applicable, depending on the fi nal use of the emergency exit device:- category A: one-leaved door, two-leaved door: active or passive leaf, push opening;- category B: only one-leaved doors, push opening;- category C: two-leaved doors, passive leaf only, push opening;- category D: one-leaved doors only, pull opening.

114

dEV

ICES

114

Provisions/EC markingPanic devices for safety exits

EC MaRKING aCCORdING TO EN 1125:2008

How to read the marking:

EC conformity marking consisting of the “ ” symbol indicated in Directive 93/68/CE

EXUS Panic exit device Product description

Ninz S.p.A. Corso Trento, 2/AI-38061 ALA (TN)/ITALY Name or identifying mark and registered address of the manufacturer

08 Last two digits of the year when the marking was applied

EN 1125:2008 Standard number

0425 Identifi cation number for the certifying body

1228-CPD-2007 EC certifi cation number

3 7 7 B 1 3 2 1 A A 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th

Product classifi cation

CLaSSIFICaTION aCCORdING TO EN 1125:2008

How to read the classifi cation:

Category of use (1st character)There is only one category of use that may be utilized:- grade 3: very frequent use with little need to pay atten-tion, in the sense of the possibility of accidents or impro-per use.

Durability (2nd character)Two different durability ratings are applicable:- grade 6: 100,000 test cycles;- grade 7: 200.000 test cycles.

Mass of the door (3rd character)Three different grades of door mass are applicable:- grade 5: up to 100 kg;- grade 6: up to 200 kg;- grade 7: over 200 kg.

Suitability for use with fire/smoke resistant doors (4th character)Three different grades are applicable:- grade 0: non approved for use on fi re/smoke resistant doors;- grade A: suitable for use on smoke resistant doors;- grade B: suitable for use on fi re/smoke resistant doors; on the basis of testing in conformity with EN 1634-1.

Human safety (5th character)Only a single human safety rating are applicable:- grade 1: all devices for panic exits must ensure human safety, so that for purposes of the present standard only the maximum rating is allowed.

Corrosion resistance (6th character)The two different corrosion resistance ratings indicated in EN 1670:2007 are applicable:- grade 3: 96 h (high resistance);- grade 4: 240 h (extra-high resistance).

Material safety (7th character)Only a single material safety rating are applicable:- grade 2: there is only one category that represents the minimum obtainable rating due to the fact that materi-al safety must be viewed as secondary relative to human safety.

Protrusion of horizontal bar (8° character)Two different grades of horizontal bar protrusion are ap-plicable:- grade 1: protrusion up to 150 mm (extra protrusion);- grade 2: protrusion up to 100 mm (standard protrusion).

Horizontal bar activation type (9th character)Two activation types are applicable:- type A: panic bars with push-bar activation (EXUS and TWIST, for example);- type B: panic bars with touch-bar activation (SLASH, for example).

Field of door application (10th character)Three different categories of fi eld of door application are applicable, depending on the fi nal use of the safety exit device:- category A: one-leaved door, two-leaved door: active or secondary leaf, push opening;- category B: only one-leaved doors, push opening;- category C: two-leaved doors, secondary leaf only, push opening.

115

dEV

ICES

115

Provisions/StandardEmergency exit devices / Anti-panic devices for safety exits

TESTING EqUIPMENT

Our company maintains its own testing and experimentation equipment in order to ensure maximum quality, reliability and innovative service to our customers.

Company furnace

Mechanical testing equipment

Operational testing equipment

116

dEV

ICES

116

Emergency exit devices NINZ

PRESENTaTION

Emergency exit devices (emergency handles)Ninz S.p.A. is a leader in fi re doors, and has once again re-asserted itself as a visionary company with a strong iden-tity created by its continuous research into the design and technology of its own products, such as the new line of emergency exit handles.The handles are marked and pre-certifi ed according to European standard EN 179:2008, which entered in effect January 01, 2010, and which prescribes a several substantial changes that further extend the requirements

for maximum safety and ease of opening.

The Kit designed for your needsWhen ordered separately from the door, the M3, M3X, M14, M14X, Hot CIL and HOT CIL-X handles are packaged in functional KITs for display and presentation in the most appropriate distribution context.Packaging in KITs ensures customers, installers and there-fore the fi nal users that they are receiving a complete anti-panic system with fully corresponding and certi-fi ed parts.

Certifi cations and replacementsGiven the importance of maintaining the entire system’s

conformity, special attention has been paid to replace-ment parts, which have been subjected to testing in ac-cordance with the EN 179:2008 standard due to their piv-otal role in maintaining certifi cation.The only way to ensure that the products maintain their original characteristics over time is by using original NINZ replacement parts.For this reason, the instructions for emergency handles in-clude additional indications regarding proper installation and maintenance plus a exploded assembly drawing that specifi es every smallest detail of the certifi ed system with all of the references required for ordering replacement parts.

NOTEHandles are considered to be accessories and assembly is required.

117

dEV

ICES

117

M3 emergency handleEmergency handle for internal locks - EN 179:2008

M3 IN BLaCK NyLON

Description Lever handle for emergency exit:-- Reversible for right or left opening-- Applicable to single leaf doors or the active leaf (main

leaf) of two-leaved doors located at emergency exits-- Suitable for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other

types of emergency exit doors-- Both the levers and the backplates are made of black

nylon, and the core of the lever and the internal in-stallation plate are made of galvanized steel

-- The lock is anti-panic/fi re rated for European profi le cylinders

-- Cylinder to pass in nickel-plated brass with 3 keys-- Suitable for doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880

mm/leaf, mass up to 300 kg/leaf, with ratings up to EI2120 - REI120 and smoke resistance, handle protru-sion of 65 mm

Applications The M3 lever handle for emergency exits is for use on doors designated for emergency situations involving peo-ple who are accustomed to using safety exits and their hardware, and who are therefore unlikely to be in a state of panic.

Operation modeWith the lock locked by key, the door can no longer be opened from the pull side, while the door can still be opened using the lever on the push side.

VERSIONS aVaILaBLE

M3 M3 ELM/mt

VaRIaTIONS ON REqUEST

-- MAC1 type panic lock, including access control mode-- Panic lock with 3 closing points (for multipurpose

PROGET doors only)-- Mastered or coded cylinders

67 16

6

23 124

72

Ø20

SUPPLIEd TOGETHER WITH THE dOOR

For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors:Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance and the strike box insert.Included (in the package): Nr. 2 black nylon lever handles, Nr. 2 gal-vanized steel internal installation plates, Nr. 2 black nylon backplates, Nr. 1 split square spindle, Nr. 1 standard nickel-plated double cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 instruction/maintenance manual.Versions available: M3, M3 ELM/mt.ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages

M3 KIT VERSION (SUPPLIEd SEPaRaTELy FROM THE dOOR)

KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:Specify the leaf thickness in the order.KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike box insert, Nr. 2 black nylon lever handles, Nr. 2 galvanized steel inter-nal installation plates, Nr. 2 black nylon backplates, Nr. 1 split square spindle, Nr. 1 standard nickel-plated double cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 instruction/maintenance manual.Versions available: M3

118

dEV

ICES

M3X emergency handleEmergency handle for internal locks - EN 179:2008

72

Ø20

75166

23 127


For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors: Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance and the strike box insert.Included (in the package): Nr. 2 stainless steel lever handles, Nr. 2 galvanized steel internal installation plates, Nr. 2 stainless backplates, Nr. 1 split square spindle, Nr. 1 standard nickel-plated double cylinder with 3 keys, fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 instruction/maintenance manual.Versions available: M3X, M3X ELM/mt.ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages

M3X KIT VERSION (SUPPLIEd SEPaRaTELy FROM THE dOOR)

KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:Specify the leaf thickness in the order.KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike box insert, Nr. 2 black nylon lever handles, Nr. 2 galvanized steel internal installation plates, Nr. 2 black nylon backplates, Nr. 1 split square spindle, Nr. 1 standard nickel-plated double cylinder with 3 keys, fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 instruction/maintenance manual.Versions available: M3X

M3X IN STaINLESS STEEL

Description Lever handle for emergency exit:-- Reversible for right or left opening-- Applicable to single leaf doors or the active leaf (main

leaf) of two-leaved doors located at emergency exits-- Suitable for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other

types of emergency exit doors-- The levers as well as the internal installation plates

are made of AISI 304 satinized stainless steel, and the backplates are made of galvanized steel

-- The lock is anti-panic/fi re rated for Euro profi le cyl-inders

-- Cylinder to pass in nickel-plated brass with 3 keys-- Suitable for doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880

mm/leaf, mass up to 300 kg/leaf, with fi re resistance up to EI2120 - REI120 and smoke resistance, handle protrusion of 75 mm

Use The M3X emergency exit handle are to be applied on doors designated for emergency situations in which the people involved are accustomed to using safety exits and their opening devices, and therefore who are very unlike-ly to be in a state of panic.

Operation modeWith the lock locked by key, the door can no longer be opened from the pull side, but the door can still be opened from the push side using the handle.

VERSIONS aVaILaBLE

M3X M3X ELM/mt

VaRIaTIONS ON REqUEST

-- MAC1 panic lock, including access control system-- Panic lock with 3 closing points (for multipurpose

PROGET doors only) -- Mastered or coded cylinders

119

dEV

ICES

Certifi cationsEmergency handle for internal locks - EN 179:2008

M3, M3X CERTIFICaTIONS

Suitable for one-leaved doors or the active leaf of two-leaved doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/leaf and a mass of 300 kg/leaf

Denomination M3, M3X DEVICE FOR EMERGENCY EXITS

Manufacturer Ninz S.p.A. Corso Trento, 2/A I-38061 ALA (TN)/ITALY

Year application trademark 10Nr. and year of the standard EN 179:2008Certifying body 0425

certificate Nr. 2147-CPD-2010

Classification 3 7 7 B 1 4 4 2 A A

1st Category of use very frequent2nd Durability 200.000 cycles3rd Door mass over 200 kg4th Suitable for fi re/smoke rated doors5th Safety, suitable for evacuation routes6th High corrosion resistance 240 h7th Material safety 1000 N8th Handle protrusion up to 100 mm9th Activation type with lever handle10th Suitable for one- or two-leaved doors

ATTESTATATTESTATOATTESTATO DI CONFORMITTÀ DI CONFORMITÀ DIRETTIVADIRETTIVA 8989 /1/1 00 6/CE6/CE EE

CERTCERTIFICATE OF CONFORMIMITYCERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY DIRECTIVEDIRECTIVE 8989 /1/1 00 6/CE6/CE EE

!

!0425

!

Questo certificato è rilasciato in conformità a quanto prescritto dall’Art.6 par.2 lettera b) del DPR 21 aprile 1993, n°246 (Direttiva 89/106/CEE) ed attesta la conformità del prodotto di seguito identificato agli Art.1, Art.2 ed allegato A del DPR 21 aprile 1993, n°246 (Direttiva 89/106/CEE)

This certificate is issued in accordance with the requirements defined in Article 6 par.2 lett. B) of DPR 21th April 1993, n° 246 (89/106/CE Directive) and certifies the compliance of the product to art. 1, art. 2 and annex A of DPR 21th April 1993, n° 246 (89/106/CE Directive)

!!

Il presente attestato è valido esclusivamente per il prodotto indicato. Eventuali varianti da apportare devono essere approvate da ICIM SpA The present certificate is valid only for the product described above. Every change has to be approved by ICIM S.p.A.

Data di emissione Issue date

Emissione corrente Current issue

!

Data di scadenza Expiring date

!12/03/2010 12/03/2010! 11/03/2020

! !

!

ICIM S.p.A. Il Presidente

Ing. Tullio Badino

!

ATTESTATATTESTAT OO N° N° 2147 - CPD - 2010 CERTIFICATECERTIFICATE N° N°

Organismo notificato Notified Body ICIM S.p.A. - Piazza Don Mapelli, 75 – 20099 SESTO SAN GIOVANNI Identification number: 0425

Dati Fabbricante Manufacturer details Sede legale NINZ S.p.A. Corso Trento, 2/A 38061 ALA (TN) ITALY Head office Unità operativa Production unit

Dati prodotto Product datails Tipologia DISPOSITIVI PER USCITE DI EMERGENZA AZIONATI MEDIANTE MANIGLIA A

LEVA O PIASTRA A SPINTA EMERGENCY EXIT DEVICES OPERATED BY A LEVER HANDLE OR PUSH PAD

Type

Dispositivo di emergenza

serie “M3” “M3X” Serrature antipanico art. AP16/18, 3201001.018, SCA 1 3201001.019/020,

MAC 1 3201001.041/042 Coppia di deviatori art. 4201010 Riscontro serratura art. 2401006, 2401005, 2401015, 2401014, 2401035,

3412001 Aste verticali art. 3305013

Denominazione

Comandi art. 3101001.009 (M3), 3101017.003 (M3X)

Denomination

Sistema di attestazione della conformità 1 System of attestation of conformity Norma di riferimento EN 179:2008 Standard reference

Classificazione 3 7 7 B 1 4 4 2 A A Classification

Eventuali estensioni Nessuna / None Extensions

Eventuali condizioni di subordine della Certificazione CE

Nessuna / None

Condition of subordination of CE

certification

120

dEV

ICES

HOT-CIL Emergency handle Emergency handle for internal locks - EN 179:2008

HOT-CIL IN BLaCK NyLON

DescriptionLever handle and fi xed doorknob for emergency exits, es-pecially for hotel rooms:-- Reversible for right or left opening-- Normally applied on single leaf doors or the active

leaf of two-leaved doors if the secondary leaf nor-mally remains closed and can only be opened manu-ally with the latch bolt (019)

-- Suitable for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types of emergency exit pull doors

-- The lever, doorknob and even the backplates are made of black nylon, while the core of the lever and the internal installation plates are made of galva-nized steel

-- The lock is anti-panic/fi re rated pull type for Euro pro-fi le cylinders

-- Mastered cylinder to pass with thumbturn latch on the pull side made of nickel-plated brass with 3 keys

-- Suitable for doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/leaf, mass up to 300 kg/leaf, with fi re rating EI2120 - REI120 and smoke resistance, handle protru-sion of 65 mm

UseThe HOT-CIL emergency exit handle is to be applied on doors designated for emergency situations in which the people involved are accustomed to using safety exits and their opening devices, and who are therefore very unlike-ly to be in a state of panic.

Operation modeThe door can be opened from the push side by key only, while it can be opened at any time from the pull side by pressing the handle, even when the lock is locked using the key. The lock has two bolts that protrude when the key or the thumbturn latch is turned.

VERSIONS aVaILaBLE

HOT-CIL HOT-CIL ELM/mt

40

46

52

67

8.5

166

23 124

72

Ø20


For the single leaf or active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors (the secondary leaf normally remains closed and can only be opened manually using the bolt lock (019)): Included (mounted on the door): the anti-panic lock with 65 mm en-trance and the strike box insert.Included (in the package): Nr. 1 lever handle and Nr. 1 fi xed doorknob in black nylon, Nr. 2 galvanized steel internal installation plates, Nr. 2 black nylon backplates, Nr. 1 square spindle, Nr. 1 mastered cylinder to pass with thumbturn latch on the pull side made of nickel-plated brass with 3 keys, fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of instructions for installation/maintenance.Versions available: HOT-CIL, HOT-CIL ELM/mt.ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages.

HOT-CIL KIT VERSION (SUPPLIEd SEPaRaTELy FROM THE dOOR)

KIT for single leaf door or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors (the secondary leaf normally remains closed and can only be opened manually using the bolt lock (019)): Specify the leaf thickness in the order. KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike box insert, Nr. 1 lever handle and Nr. 1 fi xed doorknob in black nylon, Nr. 2 galvanized steel internal installation plates, Nr. 2 black nylon backplates, Nr. 1 square spindle, Nr. 1 mastered cylinder to pass with thumbturn latch on the pull side made of nickel-plated brass with 3 keys, fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of instructions for installation/maintenance.Versions available: HOT-CIL

121

dEV

ICES

HOT-CIL-X Emergency handle Emergency handle for internal locks - EN 179:2008

HOT-CIL-X IN STaINLESS STEEL

Description Lever handle and fi xed doorknob for emergency exits, es-pecially for hotel rooms:-- Lever handle and fi xed doorknob for emergency ex-

its, especially for hotel rooms:-- Reversible for right or left opening-- Normally applied on single leaf doors or the active

leaf of two-leaved doors if the secondary leaf nor-mally remains closed and can only be opened manu-ally with the latch bolt (019)

-- Suitable for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types of emergency exit pull doors

-- The lever, doorknob and plates are made of AISI 304 satinized stainless steel, while the backplates are made of galvanized steel

-- The lock is anti-panic/fi re rated for Euro profi le cyl-inders

-- Mastered cylinder to pass with thumbturn latch on the pull side made of nickel-plated brass with 3 keys

-- Suitable for doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/leaf, masses up to 300 kg/leaf, fi re rated to EI²120 - REI120 and smoke resistance, handle protrusion of 75 mm

Application The HOT-CIL-X emergency exit handle is for use on doors designated for emergency situations in which the people involved are accustomed to using safety exits and their opening devices, and who are therefore very unlikely to be in a state of panic.

Operation modeThe door can be opened from the push side by key only, while it can be opened at any time from the pull side by pressing the handle, even when the lock is locked using the key. The lock has two bolts that protrude when the key or the thumbturn latch is turned.

VERSIONS aVaILaBLE

HOT-CIL-X HOT-CIL-X ELM/mt

72

Ø20

166

23 12746

8.5

4946 75


For the single leaf or active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors (the passive leaf (secondary) normally remains closed and can only be opened manually using the bolt lock (019)): Included (mounted on the door): the anti-panic lock with 65 mm en-trance and the strike plate insert.Included (in the package): Nr. 1 lever handle and Nr. 1 fi xed doorknob in satinized stainless steel, Nr. 2 galvanized steel internal installation plates, Nr. 2 backplates in satinized stainless steel, Nr. 1 square spin-dle, Nr. 1 mastered cylinder to pass with thumbturn latch on the pull side made of nickel-plated brass with 3 keys, fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of instructions for installa-tion/maintenance.Versions available: HOT-CIL-X, HOT-CIL-X ELM/mt. ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages.

HOT-CIL-X KIT VERSION (SUPPLIEd SEPaRaTELy FROM THE dOOR)

KIT for single leaf door or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors (the passive leaf (secondary) normally remains closed and can only be opened manually using the bolt lock (019)): Specify the leaf thickness in the order. KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike plate insert, Nr. 1 lever handle and Nr. 1 fi xed doorknob in satinized stain-less steel, Nr. 2 galvanized steel internal installation plates, Nr. 2 back-plates in satinized stainless steel, Nr. 1 square spindle, Nr. 1 mastered cylinder to pass with thumbturn latch on the pull side made of nickel-plated brass with 3 keys, fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of instructions for installation/ maintenance.Versions available: HOT-CIL-X

122

dEV

ICES

Certifi cationsEmergency handle for internal locks - EN 179:2008

HOT-CIL, HOT-CIL-X CERTIFICaTION

Suitable for one-leaved doors or two-leaved doors with the second leaf semi-fi xed and not equipped with emer-gency or anti-panic devices, with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/leaf, masses of 300 kg/leaf.

Denomination HOT-CIL, HOT-CIL-X EMERGENCY EXIT DEVICE




Classification 3 7 7 B 1 4 4 2 A D

1st Category of use very frequent2nd Durability 200.000 cycles3rd Door mass over 200 kg4th Suitable for fi re/smoke rated doors5th Safety, suitable for evacuation routes6th High corrosion resistance 240 h7th Material safety 1000 N8th Handle protrusion up to 100 mm9th Activation type with lever handle10th Suited for one-leaved doors

ATTESTATATTESTATO TÀ DI CONFORMITÀ DIRETTIVA 89/106/CEE

CERT MITYCERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY DIRECTIVE 89/106/CEE

!

!0425

!

Questo certificato è rilasciato in conformità a quanto prescritto dall’Art.6 par.2 lettera b) del DPR 21 aprile 1993, n°246 (Direttiva 89/106/CEE) ed attesta la conformità del prodotto di seguito identificato agli Art.1, Art.2 ed allegato A del DPR 21 aprile 1993, n°246 (Direttiva 89/106/CEE)


!!




!


!12/03/2010 12/03/2010! 11/03/2020

! !

!


Ing. Tullio Badino

!






Type


serie “HOT-CIL” “HOT-CIL-X”

Serrature antipanico art. 3201001.011 Coppia di deviatori art. 4201010 Riscontro serratura art. 2401006, 2401005, 2401015, 2401014

Denominazione

Comandi art. 3101001.012 (M2), 3101017.002 (M2X)

Denomination


Classificazione 3 7 7 B 1 4 4 2 A D Classification



Nessuna / None


certification

123

dEV

ICES

M14 emergency handle Emergency handle for insertion in lock - EN 179:2008

M14 IN BLaCK NyLON

Description Lever handle for emergency exit:-- Reversible for right or left opening-- For application to the secondary leaf of two-leaved

doors located at emergency exits-- Suitable for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other

types of emergency exit doors-- The lever and plate are both made of black nylon,

while the core of the lever and the internal installa-tion plate are made of galvanized steel

-- The safety lock is anti-panic fi re rated, activates the vertical rods and ensures automatic closure

-- Suitable for doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/leaf, masses up to 300 kg/leaf, with fi re rating EI2120

-- REI120 and smoke resistance, handle protrusion of 65 mm

UseThe M14 emergency exit handle is to be applied to doors designated for emergency situations in which the people involved are accustomed to using safety exits and their opening devices, and who are therefore highly unlikely to be in a state of panic. The active (main) leaf must also be equipped with an anti-panic or emergency device.

Operation modeThe M14 emergency device is always used in combination with a second device for safety or emergency exits that is applied to the active (main) leaf, and for this reason does not include external opening door furnitures.From the push side, opening is possible at any time by pushing on the handle, which causes the vertical rods to retract and at the same time pulls back the bolt of the ac-tive leaf’s lock, unlatching both doors.

67166

23 124

Ø20

9

46


For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors: Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, vertical rods, upper locking device, upper strike plate.Included (in the package): Nr. 1 lever handle (black nylon), Nr. 2 gal-vanized steel internal installation plates, Nr. 2 blank black nylon back-plates, Nr. 1 square spindle, Nr. 1 fl oor-mounted fl oor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (for fi re doors only), fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of instructions for installation/main-tenance.

M14 KIT VERSION(SUPPLIEd SEPaRaTELy FROM THE dOOR)

KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors: Please specify the door type - REVER, UNIVER or PROGET - in the order. KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 1 lever handle (black nylon), Nr. 2 galvanized steel installation plates, Nr. 2 blank black nylon backplates, Nr. 1 square spindle, Nr. 1 upper locking device (for Rever and Univer multipurpose only), Nr. 1 compan-ion arm (excluding Rever and Univer multipurpose doors), fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of instruc-tions for installation/maintenance.

124

dEV

ICES

M14X emergency handle Emergency handle for internal locks - EN 179:2008

M14X IN STaINLESS STEEL

Description Lever handle for emergency exit:-- Reversible for right or left opening-- For application to the secondary leaf of two-leaved

doors located at emergency exits-- Suitable for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types

of emergency exit doors-- The lever and backplates are both made of AISI 304

satinized stainless steel, while the internal installation plates are made of galvanized steel

-- The safety lock is anti-panic/fi re rated, activates the ver-tical rods and ensures automatic closure

-- Suitable for doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/leaf, mass up to 300 kg/leaf, with fi re rating EI2120 REI120 and smoke resistance, handle protrusion of 65 mm

UseThe M14X emergency exit handle is to be applied on doors designated for emergency situations in which the people involved are accustomed to using safety exits and their opening devices, and who are therefore highly unlikely to be in a state of panic. The active (main) leaf must also be equipped with an anti-panic or emergency device.

Operation modeThe M14X emergency device is always used in combina-tion with a second device for safety or emergency exits that is applied to the active leaf, and for this reason does not include external opening door furnitures.From the push side, opening is possible at any time by pushing on the handle, which causes the vertical rods to retract and at the same time pulls back the bolt of the ac-tive leaf’s lock, unlatching both doors.

M14, M14X CERTIFICaTION

Suited for the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors with di-mensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/leaf, masses of 300 kg/leaf.

Denomination M14 EMERGENCY EXIT DEVICE




Classification 3 7 7 B 1 4 4 2 A C

1st Category of use very frequent2nd Durability 200.000 cycles3rd Door mass over 200 kg4th Suitable for fi re/smoke rated doors5th Safety, suitable for evacuation routes6th High corrosion resistance 240 h7th Material safety 1000 N8th Handle protrusion up to 100 mm9th Activation type with lever handle10th Suited for door: two-leaved, on the secondary leaf only

Ø20

166

23 12746

8.5 75


For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors: Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, vertical rods, upper locking device, upper strike plate. Included (in the package): Nr. 1 lever handle in satinized stainless steel, Nr. 2 galvanized steel internal installation plates, Nr. 2 blank backplates in sati-nized stainless steel, Nr. 1 square spindle, Nr. 1 fl oor-mounted door catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (for fi re doors only), fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive picto-gram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of instructions for installation/maintenance.

KIT M14X VERSION (SUPPLIEd SEPaRaTELy FROM THE dOOR)

KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors: Please specify the door type - REVER, UNIVER or PROGET - in the order. KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 1 lever handle in satinized stainless steel, Nr. 2 galvanized steel internal installation plates, Nr. 2 backplates in satinized stainless steel, Nr. 1 square spindle, Nr. 1 upper locking device (for Rever and Univer multi-purpose only), Nr. 1 companion arm (excluding Rever and Univer mul-tipurpose doors), fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green ar-row), Nr. 1 set of instructions for installation/maintenance.

ATTESTATATTESTATOATTESTATO DI CONFORMITTÀ DI CONFORMITÀ DIRETTIVADIRETTIVA 8989 /1/1 00 6/CE6/CE EE

CERTCERTIFICATE OF CONFORMIMITYCERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY DIRECTIVEDIRECTIVE 8989 /1/1 00 6/CE6/CE EE

!

!0425

!

Questo certificato è rilasciato in conformità a quanto prescritto dall’Art.6 par.2 lettera b) del DPR 21 aprile 1993, n°246 (Direttiva 89/106/CEE) ed attesta la conformità del prodotto di seguito identificato agli Art.1, Art.2 ed allegato A del DPR 21 aprile 1993, n°246 (Direttiva 89 /106/CEE)


!!




!


!12/03/2010 12/03/2010! 11/03/2020

! !

!


Ing. Tullio Badino

!






Type


serie “M14” “M14X” Controserrature antipanico art. AP020P, AP020U, 3201001.006 Dispositivo superiore art. 3105080, 3105024, 3305003 Riscontro asta art. 2401046, 2401044, 2401002 Boccola pavimento art. 2401001, 2401007, 3105091, 2401020 Aste verticali art. 3305015, 3305016, 3305002, 3305005

Denominazione

Comandi art. 3101001.008 (M14), 3101017.004 (M14X)

Denomination


Classificazione 3 7 7 B 1 4 4 2 A C Classification



Nessuna / None


certification

125

dEV

ICES

126

EXU

S®

126

Presentation EXUS® panic bars

PRESENTaTION

EXUS® panic barsNinz S.p.A. is a leader in fire doors, and has once again reas-serted itself as a visionary company with a strong identity created by its continuous research into the design and tech-nology of its own products, such as the new line of EXUS® panic bars.The EXUS® panic bars are marked and according to Euro-pean standard EN 1125:2008, which entered in effect Janu-ary 01, 2010, and which prescribes a serious of substantial changes that further extend the requirements for maximum safety and ease of opening.

The KIT designed for your needsWhen ordered separately from the door, the EXUS® series of panic bars is provided in elegant and functional KITs packaged for presentation in the most appropriate for-mat for distribution.Packaging in KITs ensures customers, installers and there-fore the final users that they are receiving a complete an-ti-panic system with fully corresponding parts which are all certified.

FinishingAttention to detail and proportions are highlighted by se-lect materials and finishing.In addition to the black NYLON version combined with anodized ALUMINUM bars, new combinations include the all satinized STAINLESS STEEL version and the pol-ished chromed ALUMINUM version combined with the anodized ALUMINUM bar. Many other color and surface combinations are possible for equally aesthetic solutions.The particular aesthetics of soft forms is one of the exclu-sive advantages of EXUS® panic bars, representing the fruit of designs generated in collaboration with Studio MM Design, which has been working with the company for many years.

Certifications and replacementsGiven the importance of maintaining the entire system’s

conformity, special attention has been paid to replace-ment parts, which have been subjected to testing in ac-cordance with the EN 1125:2008 standard due to their piv-otal role in maintaining certification.The only way to ensure that the products maintain their original characteristics over time is by using original NINZ replacement parts.For this reason, the instructions for EXUS® panic bars in-clude additional indications regarding proper installation and maintenance plus a exploded assembly drawing that specifies every smallest detail of the certified system with all of the references required for ordering replacement parts.

With the new EXUS® panic bar, NINZ S.p.A. demon-strates its willingness to believe in market develop-ment by investing in designs and company image in order to endow its own products with added value while maintaining highly competitive quality-price ratios.

Black NYLON handle ALUMINUM handle with STAIN-

LESS STEEL lever handle and

chromed ALUMINUM backplate

NOTEBy default external door furni-ture is provided with the same finishing as the panic bar.

Satinized STAINLESS STEEL handle

127

EXU

S®

127

EXUS® is a registered trademark owned by Ninz S.p.A.

Also suited for doors with fire ratings:

EI2120REI 60 REI 90REI 30 smoke resistant

EXUS® - Features, certifi cationsPanic bar

FEaTURES

-- Newly designed product with state of the art techno-logical concept

-- Available several in color and surface combinations: satinized stainless steel for the lever arms and the bar, or aluminum with polished chrome lever arms and anodized aluminum bar, and fi nally the classic ever-green combination - black nylon lever arms with ano-dized aluminum bar

-- Certifi ed for internal lock with 40 or 65 mm entrances for single leaves or active leaves, with 30 or 80 mm entrance for secondary leaves and with square spin-dle rotation of up to 45°

-- Possibility of locking by key on the bar side as well-- Reversible for Right or Left mounting-- Protrusion 125 mm-- Proposed together with the door or separately in a

complete KIT packaged in a black/yellow box-- Label applied to the packaging to identify the prod-

uct‘s characteristics-- Wide range of customizations: colored bar, colored or

stainless steel handles, lock with access control mech-anisms, special coded or mastered cylinders

125

95

40

38

200

max. 1237

CERTIFICaTION

Suited for one-leaved doors or the active and secondary leaves of two-leaved doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/leaf, masses of 300 kg/leaf

Denomination EXUS PANIC BAR





1st Category of use very frequent2nd Durability 200.000 cycles3rd Door mass over 200 kg4th Suitable for fire/smoke rated doors5th Safety, suitable for evacuation routes6th High corrosion resistance 96 h7th Material safety 1000 N8th Bar protrusion up to 150 mm9th Activation type with push bar10th Suited for one- or two-leaved doors

128

EXU

S®

EXUS® LP IN BLaCK NyLON

Description The EXUS LP panic exit device consists of an anodized aluminum horizontal bar that inserts into the lever arms attached to the command mechanisms which activate the lock.

-- Reversible for right or left opening-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors-- Suited for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types of

panic exit doors-- The horizontal bar is made of extruded anodized alumi-

num with an elliptical cross-section measuring 40 x 20 mm and a length of 1150 mm

-- Two black nylon lever arms with galvanized steel core-- The two command mechanisms are made of galvanized

steel with black nylon cover plates, one of which has an EXIT label that identifies the lock side

-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cylinders-- External door furniture and the backplate are made of

black nylon, while the internal installation plate is made of galvanized steel

-- DC version with double cylinder to pass

VERSIONS aVaILaBLE

BM BSP BS BMC

BC B A DC BM

DC BSP DC BS DC ELM ELM

VaRIaTIONS ON REqUEST (see dedicated page)

-- Aluminum bar painted in RAL colors-- External BM and BSP door furnitures in satinized stainless steel-- External BM and BSP door furnitures painted in RAL colors-- MAC1 panic lock with access control system, combinable with the

BM and DC BM versions-- Mastered or coded cylinders-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the door is open

EXUS LP (SUPPLIEd WITH THE dOOR)

For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors:Included (mounted on the door): Included (in the package): Nr. 2 door command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodi-zed aluminum bar, Nr. 1 black nylon door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 double cylinder with 3 keys (DC version only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: BM, BSP, BS, BMC, BC, B (for Proget doors only), DC BM, DC BSP, DC BS, DC ELM, ELM.ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages

For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors: Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, the upper re-latch device, the upper strike plate and the ver-tical rodsIncluded (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized alumi-num bar, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (for fire doors only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: A

EXUS LP KIT

(SUPPLIEd SEPaRaTELy FROM THE dOOR)

KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:Please specify leaf thickness and door type - REVER, UNIVER or PRO-GET - in the order KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike plate insert, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter co-vers, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 black nylon external door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 double cylinder with 3 keys (DC version only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/main-tenance instructions Versions available: BM, BSP, BS, BMC, BC, DC BM, DC BSP, DC BS

KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors, suited for RE-VER, UNIVER and PROGET fire and multipurpose doors (pro-duced after 01.01.2005): specify door type on the order formKIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (exclu-ding REVER and UNIVER MULTIPURPOSE), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/mainte-nance instructions Versions available: A

KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors and suited for other types of multipurpose doors:KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 upper strike plate, Nr. 1 angular support bracket, Nr. 1 upper rod, Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 2 extension rods, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhe-sive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: A

EXUS® LP BLACK NYLON Panic bar for internal locks - EN 1125:2008

129

EXU

S®

EXUS® La IN aLUMINUM

DescriptionThe EXUS LA panic bar consists of an anodized aluminum horizontal bar that inserts into lever arms attached to the command mechanisms which activate the lock. -- Reversible for right or left opening-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors-- Suited for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types

of panic exit doors-- The horizontal bar is made of extruded anodized alu-

minum with an elliptical cross-section measuring 40 x 20 mm and a length of 1150 mm

-- The two lever arms are made of an aluminum alloy with a polished chrome finish

-- The two command mechanisms are made of galva-nized steel with aluminum alloy cover plates with a polished chrome finish, one of which has an EXIT label to identify the lock side

-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cyl-inders

-- The door furniture consist of the AISI 304 stainless steel handle or knob and the aluminum alloy back-plate with polished chrome finish

-- The arms, backplates and handle caps are finished with tri-valent chrome in compliance with the ROSH regulation


VERSIONS aVaILaBLE

BM BSP B A

DC BM DC BSP DC ELM ELM


-- Aluminum bar painted in RAL colors-- MAC1 panic lock with access control system, combin-

able with the BM and DC BM versions-- Mastered or coded cylinders-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the

door is open

EXUS La (SUPPLIEd WITH THE dOOR)

For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors:Included (mounted on the door): the anti-panic lock with 65 mm en-trance and the backplate insertIncluded (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum carter covers, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 stainless steel/aluminum door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 double cylinder with 3 keys (DC version only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of instructions for installation/main-tenance.Versions available: BM, BSP, B (for Proget doors only), DC BM, DC BSP, DC ELM, ELM.ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages

For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors: Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm en-trance, the upper re-latch device, the upper strike plate and the vertical rodsIncluded (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum carter covers, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (excluding REVER and UNIVER MULTIPURPOSE), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions Versions available: A

EXUS La KIT


KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors: Please specify leaf thickness and door type - REVER, UNIVER or PRO-GET - in the order KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike plate insert, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome alumi-num carter covers, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 stainless steel/aluminum external door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 double cylinder with 3 keys (DC version only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: BM, BSP, DC BM, DC BSP

KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors, suited for REVER, UNIVER and PROGET fire and multipurpose doors (produced after 01.01.2005): specify door type on the order formKIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum carter covers, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (excluding REVER and UNIVER MULTIPURPOSE), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: A

KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors and suited for other types of multipurpose doors:KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 chromed aluminum carter covers, Nr. 2 chromed aluminum lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 upper strike plate, Nr. 1 angular support bracket, Nr. 1 upper rod, Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 2 extension rods, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling tem-plate, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions Versions available: A

EXUS® LA ALUMINUMPanic exit device for internal locks - EN 1125:2008

130

EXU

S®

EXUS® LX IN STaINLESS STEEL

DescriptionThe entire EXUS LX panic bar is made of stainless steel, and consists of a horizontal bar that inserts into lever arms at-tached to the command mechanisms which activate the lock.

-- Maximum corrosion resistance and noteworthy robust-ness of the entire set

-- Optimal aesthetic appearance-- Reversible for right or left opening-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors-- Suited for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types of

panic exit doors-- The horizontal bar is made of AISI 304 satinized stainless

steel with an elliptical cross-section measuring 40 x 20 mm, length of 1150 mm

-- The two lever arms are made of AISI 304 satinized stain-less steel

-- The two command mechanisms are made of AISI 304 stainless steel

-- The two backplates and the cover caps are made of AISI 304 satinized stainless steel, and one is labeled with EXIT to identify the lock side

-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cylinders-- The door furnitures and related backplate are made of

AISI 304 satinized stainless steel, while the internal instal-lation plate is made of galvanized steel


VERSIONS aVaILaBLE

BM BSP B A

DC BM DC BSP DC ELM ELM


-- MAC1 panic lock with access control system, combin-able with the BM and DC BM versions

-- Mastered or coded cylinders-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the

door is open

EXUS LX (SUPPLIEd WITH THE dOOR)

For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors:Included (mounted on the door): the anti-panic lock with 65 mm en-trance and the backplate insertIncluded (in the package): Nr. 2 stainless steel command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel carter covers, Nr. 2 stainless steel lever arms, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar, Nr. 1 stainless steel door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylin-der with 3 keys, Nr. 1 double cylinder with 3 keys (DC version only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: BM, BSP, B (for Proget doors only), DC BM, DC BSP, DC ELM, ELM.ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages

For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors: Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, the upper re-latch device, the upper strike plate and the ver-tical rodsIncluded (in the package): Nr. 2 stainless steel command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel carter covers, Nr. 2 stainless steel lever arms, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (for fire doors only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive picto-gram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: A

EXUS LX KIT


KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:Please specify leaf thickness and door type - REVER, UNIVER or PRO-GET - in the order KIT contents: Nr. 1 reversible anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike plate insert, Nr. 2 stainless steel command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel carter covers, Nr. 2 stainless steel lever arms, Nr. 1 stain-less steel bar, Nr. 1 stainless steel external door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 double cylinder with 3 keys (DC version only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: BM, BSP, DC BM, DC BSP

KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors, suited for REVER, UNIVER and PROGET fire and multipurpose doors (produced af-ter 01.01.2005): specify door type on the order formKIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2 stainless steel command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel carter covers, Nr. 2 stainless steel lever arms, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (excluding REVER and UNIVER MULTIPURPOSE), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/mainte-nance instructionsVersions available: A

KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors and suited for other types of multipurpose doors:KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2 stainless steel command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel carter cov-ers, Nr. 2 stainless steel lever arms, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 upper strike plate, Nr. 1 angular support bracket, Nr. 1 upper rod, Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 2 extension rods, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/mainte-nance instructions Versions available: A

EXUS® LX STAINLESS STEELPanic exit device for internal locks - EN 1125:2008

131

EXU

S®

KIT EXUS® LP and LA for glazed doorsPanic exit device for internal locks - EN 1125:2008

EXUS® LP KIT IN BLaCK NyLON

Description The EXUS LP panic exit device consists of an anodized aluminum horizontal bar that inserts into the lever arms attached to the command mechanisms which activate the lock.

-- Reversible for right or left opening-- For application to the glazed door locks on single or

two-leaved doors-- The horizontal bar is made of extruded anodized alu-


-- Two black nylon lever arms with galvanized steel core-- The two command mechanisms are made of galva-

nized steel with black nylon cover plates, one of which has an EXIT label that identifies the lock side

-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for glass door locking mechanisms and uses Euro profile cylinders

-- The door furnitures are made of glossy black resin

VERSIONS aVaILaBLE

KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors: KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 40 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike plate insert, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon backplates, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 ex-ternal handle with black resin rosette, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions

Article Nr. Bar KIT Thicknesses up to

4204306.001 EX LP BM V 70 mm

4204306.002 EX LP DC BM V 70 mm

DC - Versions for cylinders to pass (cylinder not included), AISI stainless steel mechanisms

KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors:KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 30 mm entrance, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 upper strike box, Nr. 1 upper rod, Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 1 extension rod, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 adhesive picto-gram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions


4204306.003 EX LP A V 70 mm

EXUS® La KIT IN aLUMINUM

DescriptionThe EXUS LA panic exit device consists of a horizontal bar that inserts into the lever arms attached to the command mechanisms which activate the lock. -- Reversible for right or left opening-- For application to the glazed door locks on single or

two-leaved doors-- The horizontal bar is made of extruded anodized alu-



-- The two command mechanisms are made of galva-nized steel with aluminum alloy backplates with pol-ished chrome finishing, one of which has an EXIT label to identify the lock side

-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for glass door locking mechanisms and uses Euro profile cylinders

-- Door furnitures made of satinized stainless steel-- The arms and carters are finished with tri-valent

chrome in compliance with the ROSH regulations

VERSIONS aVaILaBLE

KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 40 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike plate insert, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome alu-minum carter covers, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 external handle with stainless steel rosette, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installa-tion/maintenance instructions


4204306.004 EX LA BM V 70 mm

4204306.005 EX LA DC BM V 70 mm

DC - Versions for cylinders to pass (cylinder not included), AISI stainless steel mechanisms

KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors:KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 30 mm entrance, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum carter covers, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 upper strike plate, Nr. 1 upper rod, Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 1 extension rod, Nr. 1 recessed floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of instal-lation/maintenance instructions


4204306.006 EX LA A V 70 mm

132

EXU

S®

KIT EXUS® LX for glazed doorsPanic exit device for internal locks - EN 1125:2008

EXUS® LX KIT IN STaINLESS STEEL

DescriptionThe entire EXUS LX panic exit device is made of stainless steel, and consists of a horizontal bar that inserts into the lever arms attached to the command mechanisms which activate the lock.

-- Maximum corrosion resistance and noteworthy ro-bustness of the entire set

-- Optimal aesthetic appearance-- Reversible for right or left opening-- For application to the glazed door locks on single or

two-leaved doors-- The horizontal bar is made of AISI 304 satinized stain-

less steel with a 40 x 20 mm elliptical cross-section and a length of 1150 mm

-- The two lever arms are made of AISI 304 satinized stainless steel


-- The two carters and cover caps are made of AISI 304 satinized stainless steel, and one is labeled with EXIT to identify the lock side

-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for glazed door locks and uses Euro profile cylinders

-- External door furniture made of satinized stainless steel

VERSIONS aVaILaBLE

KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:KIT contents: Nr. 1 reversible anti-panic lock with 40 mm entrance, Nr. 1 lock strike plate, Nr. 2 stainless steel command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel carter covers, Nr. 2 stainless steel lever arms, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar, Nr. 1 external handle with stainless steel rosette, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/main-tenance instructions


4204306.007 EX LX BM V 70 mm

4204306.008 EX LX DC BM V 70 mm

DC - Versions for cylinder to pass (cylinder not included)

KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors:KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 30 mm entrance, Nr. 2 stainless steel command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel carter covers, Nr. 2 stainless steel lever arms, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 upper strike plate, Nr. 1 upper rod, Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 1 extension rod, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/mainte-nance instructions


4204306.009 EX LX A V 70 mm

dOOR FURNITURES FOR GLaZEd dOORS

Article Nr. Description

4211104.002 Stainless steel handle with rosette, satinized finish, standard for KIT EXUS LA and LX

4211104.001 Glossy black resin handle with rosette, standard for EXUS LP

BM DC BM A


-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the door is open

-- The horizontal bar of LP and LA versions can be pain-ted an RAL tint

-- The handle of LP versions can be in satinized stainless steel

NOTEIt is obligatory for secondary leaves to include a companion arm to ensure correct functioning of the closing regulator and, if necessary, also to keep the two leaves from getting blocked when opened simul-taneously.

133

EXU

S®

134

TWIS

T

134

Presentation TWIST panic bars

PRESENTaTION

TWIST panic barsTWIST panic bars are marked in accordance with Euro-pean standard EN 1125:2008, which entered in effect January 01, 2010, and which prescribes a series of substantial changes that further extend the requirements for maximum safety and ease of opening.

The KIT designed for your needsWhen ordered separately from the door, the TWIST series of panic bars is provided in elegant and functional KITs packaged for presentation in the most appropriate format for distribution.Packaging in KITs ensures customers, installers and there-fore the final users that they are receiving a complete anti-panic system with fully corresponding parts that are all certified.

FinishingThe TWIST panic exit device series is proposed in a black NYLON version combined with an anodized ALUMINUM bar. On request, the bar and the door furniture may be painted an RAL colors, opening up an infinite variety of aes-thetic solutions.


conformity, special attention has been paid to replace-ment parts, which have been subjected to testing in ac-cordance with the EN 1125:2008 standard due to their piv-otal role in maintaining certification.The only way to ensure that the products maintain their original characteristics over time is by using original NINZ replacement parts.For this reason, the instructions for TWIST panic bars in-clude additional indications regarding proper installation and maintenance plus a explosion assembly drawing that specifies every smallest detail of the certified system with all of the references required for ordering replacement parts.

With the new packaging of the TWIST panic exit device, NINZ S.p.A. demonstrates its intent to believe in market develop-ment by investing in designs and company image in order to endow its own products with added value while maintaining highly competitive quality-price ratios.

NOTEThe TWIST exit device series is combined with a black NYLON handle.

Black NYLON handle

135

TWIS

T

135

Also suited for doors with fire ratings:


TWIST - Features, certifi cationsPanic bar

FEaTURES

-- The classic line of panic bars, an ever-green, available in the standard combination with black nylon arms/caps and anodized aluminum bar

-- Certifi ed for internal locks with a 65 mm entrance for single leaves or active leaves, and with an 80 mm en-trance for secondary leaves

-- Reversible for mounting on Right or Left doors-- Protrusion 100 mm-- Proposed together with the door or separately in a com-

plete KIT packaged in a single black/green box-- Packaging is labeled to identify product characteristics-- Wide range of customizations: colored bar, colored or

stainless steel handles, locks with access control systems, special coded or mastered cylinders

200

38100

40

max. 1238

85

CERTIFICaTION

Suited for one-leaved doors or the active and secondary leaves of two-leaved doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/leaf, masses of 300 kg/leaf

Denomination TWIST PANIC BAR





1st Category of use very frequent2nd Durability 200.000 cycles3rd Door mass over 200 kg4th Suitable for fi re/smoke rated doors5th Safety, suitable for evacuation routes6th High corrosion resistance 96 h7th Material safety 1000 N8th Bar protrusion up to 150 mm9th Activation type with push bar10th Suitable for one- or two-leaved doors

136

TWIS

T

TWIST IN BLaCK NyLON

DescriptionThe TWIST nylon panic bar consists of an anodized alumi-num horizontal bar that inserts into the lever arms attached to the command mechanisms used to activate the lock.

-- Reversible for right or left opening-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors-- Suited for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types




nized steel with black nylon backplates, one of which has an EXIT label that identifies the lock side

-- The lock is anti-panic/fire resistance for Euro profile cylinders

-- Door furnitures and the backplate are made of black nylon, while the installation plate is made of galva-nized steel

VERSIONS aVaILaBLE

BM BSP BS BMC

BC B A ELM


-- Aluminum bar painted in RAL colors-- External BM and BSP commands in satinized stainless

steel-- External BM and BSP commands painted in RAL colors-- MAC1 panic lock with access control mode, combin-

able with the BM version-- Mastered or encrypted cylinders-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the

door is open

TWIST (SUPPLIEd WITH THE dOOR)

For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors:Included (mounted on the door): the anti-panic lock with 65 mm en-trance and the backplate insertIncluded (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized alumi-num bar, Nr. 1 black nylon external door furniture door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive picto-gram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: BM, BSP, BS, BMC, BC, B (for Proget doors only), ELM/mt and ELM/cisa.ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages

For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors: Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, the upper re-latch device, the upper strike plate and the ver-tical rodsIncluded (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized alu-minum bar, Nr. 1 floor-mounted door catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (for fire doors only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions Versions available: A

TWIST KIT


KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors: Please specify leaf thickness and door type - REVER, UNIVER or PRO-GET - in the order KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike plate insert, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter cov-ers, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 black nylon external door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions Versions available: BM, BSP, BS, BMC, BC

KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors, suited for REVER, UNIVER and PROGET fire and multipurpose doors (produced af-ter 01.01.2005): specify door type on the order formKIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (exclud-ing REVER and UNIVER MULTIPURPOSE), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/mainte-nance instructions Versions available: A

KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors and suited for other types of multipurpose doors:KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 upper strike plate, Nr. 1 angular support bracket, Nr. 1 upper rod, Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 2 extension rods, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 ad-hesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions Versions available: A

TWISTPanic exit device for internal locks - EN 1125:2008

137

TWIS

T

138

SLa

SH

138

Presentation SLASH panic bars

PRESENTaTION

SLASH panic barsNinz S.p.A. is a leader in fire doors, and has once again reas-serted itself as a visionary company with a strong identity created by its continuous research into the design and tech-nology of its own products, such as the new line of SLASH panic bars.All SLASH handles are marked and pre-certified accord-ing to European standard EN 1125:2008, which entered in ef-fect January 01, 2010, to prescribe a serious of substantial changes that further extend the requirements for maximum safety and ease of opening.

The KIT designed for your needsWhen ordered separately from the door, the SLASH se-ries of panic bars is provided in elegant and functional KITs packaged for presentation in the most appropriate distribu-tion format.Packaging in KITs ensures customers, installers and there-fore the final users that they are receiving a complete anti-panic system with fully corresponding parts that are all certified.

FinishingIn addition to the black NYLON version combined with anodized ALUMINUM bars, new combinations include the satinized STAINLESS STEEL version and the pol-ished chromed ALUMINUM version combined with the anodized ALUMINUM bar. Many other color and sur-face combinations are possible for equally aesthetic solu-tions.


conformity, special attention has been paid to replace-ment parts, which have been subjected to testing in ac-cordance with the EN 1125:2008 standard due to their piv-otal role in maintaining certification.The only way to ensure that the products maintain their original characteristics over time is by using original NINZ replacement parts.For this reason, the instructions for SLASH panic bars in-clude additional indications regarding proper installation and maintenance plus a blow-up drawing that specifies every smallest detail of the certified system with all of the references required for ordering replacement parts.

With the expansion of the line and the new packaging of the SLASH panic bar, NINZ S.p.A. demonstrates its faith in market development by investing in designs and company image in order to endow its fire doors and the series of accessories with added value while continuing to maintain highly com-petitive quality-price ratios.

Black NYLON handle ALUMINUM handle with STAINLESS

STEEL lever handle and chromed

ALUMINUM plate

NOTEThe external door furnitures for this series are provided with the same finishing as the panic bar.

Satinized STAINLESS STEEL handle

139

SLa

SH

139

Also suited for doors with classifications up to:


SLASH - Features, certifi cationsPanic bar

FEaTURES

-- Panic bar that stands out from the others due to its particular design and the rounded shapes of the car-ters. This characteristic not only improves aesthetic ap-peal, but it also eliminates any risk of injury during use

-- Available in different color and surface combinations, in satinized stainless steel for the cover carters and the bar, or with polished chromed aluminum carters and anodized aluminum bar, and then there is always the classic combination that is still in fashion - black nylon carters with anodized aluminum bar

-- Certifi ed for internal locks with a 65 mm entrance for single leaves or active leaves, and with an 80 mm en-trance for passive leaves

-- Reversible for Right or Left mounting-- Protrusion 75 mm-- Proposed together with the door or separately in a

complete KIT packaged in a single black/orange box-- Label applied to the packaging to identify the pro-

duct’s characteristics-- Wide range of customizations: colored bar, colored or

stainless steel handles, lock with access control me-chanisms, special encrypted or mastered cylinders

•-•- W

60

40

75

55reduced version

(AR) ALU max. 400, S.STEEL max. 434

max. 1354 11027

CERTIFICaTION

Suited for one-leaved doors or the active and passive le-aves of two-leaved doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/leaf, masses of 300 kg/leaf.

Denomination SLASH PANIC BAR


Year application trademark 08Nr. and year of the standard EN 1125:2008Certifying body 0425CE certificate Nr. 1308-CPD-2007

Classification 3 7 7 B 1 3 2 2 B A

1st Category of use very frequent2nd Durability 200.000 cycles3rd Door mass over 200 kg4th Suitable for fi re/smoke rated doors5th Safety, suitable for evacuation routes6th High corrosion resistance 96 h7th Material safety 1000 N8th Bar protrusion up to 100 mm9th Activation type with touch bar10th Suitable for one- or two-leaved doors

140

SLa

SH

SLaSH IN BLaCK NyLON

DescriptionThe SLASH panic bar consists of an anodized aluminum horizontal bar and an internal connection tube that inserts into the command mechanisms which activate the lock.

-- Reversible for right or left opening-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors-- Suited for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types


minum with an elliptical cross-section measuring 40 x 20 mm and a length of 1150 mm, equipped with a connection tube

-- The two command mechanisms are made of gal-vanized steel with black nylon carter covers, one of which has a green label that identifies the lock side

-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cyl-inders

-- The door furnitures and the backplate are made of black nylon, while the internal installation plate is made of galvanized steel

VERSIONS aVaILaBLE

BM BSP BS BMC

BC B A AR ELM


-- Aluminum bar painted in RAL colors-- External BM and BSP commands in satinized stainless steel-- External BM and BSP commands painted in RAL colors-- MAC1 panic lock with access control mode, combin-

able with BM versions-- Mastered or encoded cylinders-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the

door is open

SLaSH (SUPPLIEd WITH THE dOOR)

For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors:Included (mounted on the door): the anti-panic lock with 65 mm en-trance and the backplate insertIncluded (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 backplate in RAL 9006 colored nylon with internal installation plate (for REVER and UNIVER doors), Nr. 1 black nylon external door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installa-tion/maintenance instructionsVersions available: BM, BSP, BS, BMC, BC, B (for Proget doors only), ELM/mt and ELM/cisa.ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages

For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors: Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, the upper re-latch device, the upper strike plate and the ver-tical rodsIncluded (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (for fire doors only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions Versions available: A, AR (reduced) for secondary leaves with FM L2 width ≤ 500mm

SLaSH KIT


KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors: Please specify leaf thickness and door type - REVER, UNIVER or PRO-GET - in the order KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike plate insert, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter cov-ers, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 backplate in RAL 9006 colored nylon with internal installation plate, Nr. 1 black nylon door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: BM, BSP, BS, BMC, BC

KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors, suited for REVER, UNIVER and PROGET fire and multipurpose doors (produced af-ter 01.01.2005): specify door type on the order formKIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2 com-mand mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (excluding REVER and UNIVER MULTIPURPOSE), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green ar-row), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions Versions available: A, AR (reduced) for use with passive leaves with FM L2 width ≤ 500mm

KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors and suited for other types of multipurpose doors:KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 1 anodized alu-minum bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 upper strike plate, Nr. 1 angular support bracket, Nr. 1 upper rod, Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 2 extension rods, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions Versions available: A, AR (reduced) for use with passive leaves with FM L2 width ≤ 500mm

SLASH BLACK NYLONPanic bar for internal locks - EN 1125:2008

141

SLa

SH

SLaSH IN aLUMINUM

DescriptionThe SLASH ALU panic bar consists of an anodized aluminum horizontal bar and an internal connection tube that inserts into the command mechanisms which activate the lock. -- Reversible for right or left opening-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors-- Suited for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types


minum with an elliptical cross-section measuring 40 x 20 mm and a length of 1150 mm, equipped with a connection tube

-- The two command mechanisms are made of galva-nized steel with aluminum alloy cover plates with pol-ished chrome finishing, one of which has a green label to identify the lock side

-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cylinders-- The external door furniture consist of the AISI 304

stainless steel handle or knob and aluminum alloy plate with polished chrome finish

-- The carters and handle plate are finished with tri-valent chrome in compliance with the ROSH regulation

VERSIONS aVaILaBLE

BM BSP B

A AR ELM


-- Aluminum bar painted in RAL colors-- MAC1 panic lock with access control system, combin-

able with BM versions-- Mastered or encoded cylinders-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the

door is open

SLaSH aLU (SUPPLIEd WITH THE dOOR)

For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors:Included (mounted on the door): the anti-panic lock with 65 mm en-trance and the backplate insertIncluded (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum cover plates, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 backplate in black nylon with in-ternal installation plate (for REVER and UNIVER doors), Nr. 1 stainless steel/aluminum external door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions Versions available: BM, BSP, B (for Proget doors only), ELM/mt and ELM/cisa.ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages

For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors: Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm en-trance, the upper re-latch device, the upper strike plate and the vertical rodsIncluded (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum cover plates, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (for fire doors only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 ad-hesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions Versions available: A, AR (reduced) for secondary leaves with FM L2 width ≤ 500mm

SLaSH aLU KIT


KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors: Please specify leaf thickness and door type - REVER, UNIVER or PRO-GET - in the order KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike box insert, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome alu-minum cover plates, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 backplate in black nylon with internal installa-tion plate, Nr. 1 stainless steel/aluminum external door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive picto-gram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: BM, BSP

KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors, suited for REVER, UNIVER and PROGET fire and multipurpose doors (produced af-ter 01.01.2005): specify door type on the order formKIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum cover plates, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (excluding REVER and UNIVER MULTIPURPOSE), Nr. 1 drilling tem-plate, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: A, AR (reduced) for use with passive leaves with FM L2 width ≤ 500mm

KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors and suited for other types of multipurpose doors:KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 chromed aluminum cover plates, Nr. 1 ano-dized aluminum bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 upper strike plate, Nr. 1 angular support bracket, Nr. 1 upper rod, Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 2 extension rods, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pic-togram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: A, AR (reduced) for use with passive leaves with FM L2 width ≤ 500mm

SLASH ALU ALUMINUMPanic bar for internal locks - EN 1125:2008

142

SLa

SH

SLaSH IN STaINLESS STEEL

DescriptionThe SLASH STAINLESS STEEL panic bar consists of a stainless steel horizontal bar and an internal connection tube that in-serts into the command mechanisms which activate the lock.

-- Optimal corrosion and shock resistance-- State of the art aesthetics-- Secure attachment of carters-- Reversible for right or left opening-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors-- Suited for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types

of panic exit doors-- The horizontal bar is made of AISI 304 satinized stain-

less steel with a 40 x 20 mm elliptical cross-section and a length of 1150 mm, equipped with a connection tube

-- The two command mechanisms are made of galvanized steel with AISI 304 stainless steel cover plates, one of which has a green label that identifies the lock side

-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cylinders-- The external door furniture and related backplate are

made of AISI 304 satinized stainless steel, while the internal installation plate is made of galvanized steel

VERSIONS aVaILaBLE

BM BSP B

A AR ELM


-- MAC1 panic lock with access control system, combinable with BM versions

-- Mastered or coded cylinders-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the door

is open

SLaSH STaINLESS STEEL (SUPPLIEd WITH THE dOOR)

For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors:Included (mounted on the door): the anti-panic lock with 65 mm en-trance and the backplate insertIncluded (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel cover plates, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 backplate in black-colored nylon with internal installation plate (for REVER and UNIVER doors), Nr. 1 stainless steel external door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/mainte-nance instructionsVersions available: BM, BSP, B (for Proget doors only), ELM/mt and ELM/cisa.ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages

For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors: Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, the upper re-latch device, the upper strike plate and the vertical rodsIncluded (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel cover plates, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (for fire doors only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installa-tion/maintenance instructions Versions available: A, AR (reduced) for secondary leaves with FM L2 width ≤ 500mm

SLaSH STaINLESS STEEL KIT


KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors: Please specify leaf thickness and door type - REVER, UNIVER or PRO-GET - in the order KIT contents: Nr. 1 reversible anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike plate insert, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel cover plates, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 backplate in black nylon with internal installation plate, Nr. 1 stain-less steel door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installa-tion/maintenance instructionsVersions available: BM, BSP

KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors, suited for REVER, UNIVER and PROGET fire and multipurpose doors (pro-duced after 01.01.2005): specify door type on the order formKIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel cover plates, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (excluding REVER and UNIVER MULTIPURPOSE), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pic-togram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: A, AR (reduced) for use with passive leaves with FM L2 width ≤ 500mm

KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors and suited for other types of multipurpose doors:KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2 com-mand mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel cover plates, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 upper strike plate, Nr. 1 angular support bracket, Nr. 1 upper rod, Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 2 extension rods, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: A, AR (reduced) for use with passive leaves with FM L2 width ≤ 500mm

SLASH STAINLESS STEELPanic bar for internal locks - EN 1125:2008

143

SLa

SH

General informationPanic bars - System components

COMPONENTS OF THE CERTIFIEd SySTEM

All NINZ panic bars are supplied in complete KITs to ensure conformity with EN 1125:2008 standards and certifi-cation of the product. When supplied together with the door, several of these components are already mounted

on the leaf and/or doorframe.The purpose of the following examples is to help clarify what panic bars must include to comply with certified samples.

Components of the EXUS system for one-leaved doors

Components of the EXUS system for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors

144

EXIT

dEV

ICES

STaINLESS STEEL EXTERNaL dOOR FURNITURE

For all black nylon exit devices (except for those designed for glazed doors), satinized stainless steel external BM and BSP commands are available on request.

COLOREd PLaSTIC EXTERNaL dOOR FURNITURE

For all black nylon exit devices (except for those designed for glazed doors), painted polypropylene PP external BM and BSP commands are available on request.

Colors available:

RAL 1023

RAL 7016

RAL 7035

RAL 9006*

RAL 9010

PaINTEd HORIZONTaL BaR

For all exit devices (except for those with a stainless steel bar), the aluminum horizontal bar may be painted in the RAL color of your choice.

VERSION „E“ WITH MICROSWITCH

All exit devices may be equipped with a microswitch incor-porated in the hinge side mechanism for signaling when the door is open. The cable and cable sleeve for the elec-trical connection between the exit device and the wall are included.

“MaC1®” aCCESS CONTROL SySTEM For all exit devices with type BM external door furniture (except for those designed for glazed doors), the panic lock is also available with the access control function. The KIT contents include the MAC1 lock, the external door fur-niture and, when supplied together with a door, the con-nection cable with connector and cable sleeve. The lock is not reversible, so the opening direction of the door needs to be specifi ed.

MAC1: - Powered at 12-24 V DC, 12-24 V AC - 250 mA absorption with startup at 500 mA - Timer incorporated, time set at 30 seconds - Possibility for continuous power supply (open setting)

BM stainless steel BSP stainless steel

BMC colored RAL1023 BSPC colored RAL1023

Handle for MAC1 lock with LED

For sizes, information and technicaldata consult the dedicated pages

Variations on requestFor panic bars

*light aluminum

145

EXIT

dEV

ICES

Dimensional drawingsFor panic exit device components


3201001.016 Lock for one-leaved doors and active leaves (AP 16/18)

3201001.024 Safety lock for secondary leaves (AP 020 P)

3201001.008 Safety lock for secondary leaves of UNIVER multipurpose and REVER (AP 020 U)

3201001.041 MAC1 Left lock

3201001.042 MAC1 Right lock

2401001.001 Lower floor catch for secondary leaf of PROGET and MULTIPURPOSE

3105019.001 Lower floor catch for secondary leaf of UNIVER

3105020.001 Lower floor catch for secondary leaf of REVER

2401006.001 Strike plate insert for one-leaved doors of PROGET and MULTIPURPOSE

3105080.001 Upper re-latch device for secondary leaf of PROGET and MULTIPURPOSE

3105024.001 Upper re-latch device for secondary leaf of UNIVER and REVER

2401046.001 Upper strike box for passive leaf of PROGET and MULTIPURPOSE

3305001.001 Companion arm for passive leaf

33 111

185

24

209

235

17

85

65

9

96

75

37

30

185

17

239

265

49

98

77

37

34

185

17

239

265

49

65

85

37

185

209

23572

25

24

19

9

Lock for one-leaved doors and active leaves Safety lock for secondary leaf

MAC1 lock (LX example)Safety lock for secondary leaf of UNIVER multipurpose and REVER

146

EXIT

dEV

ICES

37

1340

15

5

10

52

1829 32

13

21

Ø18

Ø2014

220

10-20

21

13

51

Ø18

70 40

26

12

35

22

14

Ø63

38

203656

12

51

18

20

34

63 59 55

15

Dimensional drawings For panic exit device components

Lower floor catch for passive leaf of PROGET and MULTIPURPOSE Upper re-latch device for secondary leaf of PROGET and MULTIPURPOSE

Upper re-latch device for secondary leaf of UNIVER and REVERLower floor catch for passive leaf of UNIVER

Upper strike box for secondary leaf of PROGET and MULTIPURPOSELower floor catch for passive leaf of REVER

Companion arm for secondary leafStrike plate insert for one-leaved doors of PROGET and MULTIPURPOSE

147

EXIT

dEV

ICES

169

59

100

283

32,5

195

313

22

15

40

4057,5

92

3

322

240

45

2217

1

Glass door dimensional drawingsFor panic exit device components


4506002.17(V) Lock for single leaf or active leaf

4506002.18(V) Safety lock for secondary leaf

4506006(V) Strike box for one-leaved doors

3105000 Upper re-latch device and upper strike box for secondary leaf

3105099 Lower floor catch for secondary leaf

1090

3 5230

45129

30 28

124,5 375

195

345

103

45

282

Ø19

4029

Ø10

24

Ø25

30

Ø18

Lock for single leaf or active leaf

Strike box for one-leaved door

Upper strike box for secondary leaf

Safety lock for secondary leaf

Lower floor catch for secondary leafleaf

Upper re-latch device for secondary leaf

148

EXIT

dEV

ICES

NoticesFor panic exit device components

NOTICES

For panic exit devices, the human safety features are of fundamental importance in terms of their conformity with EN 1125:2008, which permits no modifications of any kind except for those described in the manufacturer’s in-stallation instructions.

All of NINZ’s installation instructions for panic exit devices include a list of elements that have been tested and ap-proved for use with panic exit devices and that can be packaged separately.

No modifications to the certified system are permitted, and every component must remain unchanged.

No uncertified components are applicable, and therefore the package contains certified components only.

Panic exit device components that are produced in con-formity with European standards will provide a high level of human safety and an appropriate level of safety for material goods, as long as the doors and frames they are mounted on are in good condition.

Installation should only be carried out by qualified per-sonnel and in strict conformity with the manufacturer’s instructions.

After installation is complete, a dynamometer is used to measure the force required to release the lock by pressing on the horizontal bar and the measured forces are record-ed in the maintenance register.

The instructions must be kept on file by the owner of the activity.

149

EXIT

dEV

ICES

“the fire barrier for any size”

NINZ sliding gatesFiRE dOORs

FEATURES 152 - 155

OPERATING MODE 156

OPTIONAL - MANDATORY ACCESSORIES 157 - 161

PEDESTRIAN DOORS 162 - 163

EXPLOSIVE COMPONENTS DRAWING 164 - 165

All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced technical changes to the contents of this brochure. Fire rated closures are typically used for internal compartmentalization and have been designed for this purpose.

152

slid

ing

gat

es

Features Sliding gates

WHAT dEFinEs THEM?

REI120 and REI180 fire rated gates are available with hori-zontal sliding.The field of application includes the closure of large open-ings and/or special usage conditions in the dimensions re-quested by the customer. Gates are supplied with leaves made with flush panels of insulated sheet metal, top tu-bular tracks, protective carters, counterweights, thermal or electromagnetic fuses and finished with a base coat or RAL colors, plus other accessories required for the correct functioning of the product.

StandardsThe gates are certified in accordance with the UNI 9723 standard in compliance with the ministerial provisions in effect.

Opening directionThe opening direction needs to be specified when the or-der is placed.

Left opening direction - one-leaved Right opening direction - one-leaved gate

Two-leaved gates

left leaf right leaf

Two-leaved gates available in the following classes:

REI 60 REI 90REI 30

NOTEFire rated gates require careful design which reflects their dimensions and special functions. Every installation site should be measured and checked for vertical alignment of the walls and gradients of the floor-ing. Particular care must be taken to check for protrusions or blockages

that might hinder the operation or free movement of the gates. Given the considerable weight of gates, the bearing capacity of the walls and crossbeams involved should be checked for the mounting of top guide tracks and overlapping labyrinths.

Sliding gates available in the following classes:

REI 60 REI 90REI 30 REI 180 REI 180 REI 90REI 30

ATTENTIONFire compartmentalization elements should always be used properly. They are only designed for installation in spaces and constructions that are vertically aligned and flush.Compartmentalization for interiors is for areas that are not subject to strong air currents. Installation to be executed by specialized techni-cians only. For special applications consult with our technical office.The holding system for the gate is chosen by the customer to conform with their own worksite needs and the anti-fire design (thermal fuse or electromagnet).

153

slid

ing

gat

es

Walls with a weight-bearing portion suited for attachment of the sliding guide

1015

300

NB: Guide track gradient of 2 mm/ml

150

120

80

230

Wal

l ope

ning

H (m

in. 5

00)

FFL

Ope

ning

Weight-bearing beam

250* Wall opening L L + 250

120

51

150

51

*Variable dimensions for larger-sized gates


REi 120 OnE-lEAVEd VERsiOn

The sliding gates series has the following characteristics:

Installation On weight-bearing masonry walls or insulated steel or in-sulated steel structure.

Gate leavesMade of continuous panels of hollow-core sheet metal insulated with appropriate materials. Assembly involves screwing the structure to pre-prepared horizontal pro-files. Leaf thickness 80 mm.

Top guide trackFor horizontal sliding, made of press-folded steel with pre-drilled holes for attachment using plugs (not included). Over-head sliding on low friction carriages. The extension of the floor-mounted guide track beyond the opening ensures the perpendicularity of the leaf. The top guide track is covered by a protection carter made of press-folded sheet metal.

Overlapping labyrinthsMade of press-folded steel.

CounterweightFor adjustable closure and protected by press-folded sheet metal carters, with counterstrike inset.

Door handlesRecessed on both sides.

SealingThermo-expanding on all overlapping labyrinths and un-derneath the leaf.

Identification plate Marking with reference information that is applied di-rectly to the handle.

FinishingWith a base coat thermoset in a 160 degree C furnace, light turquoise pastel color (similar to NCS4020-B50G).

PackagingModules in disposable metal container.

Wall opening dimensionsMin. 600 x 500 mm, max. 6000 x 6000 mm(larger sizes on request).

Operation mode Of the gate series with thermal fuse: the gate can stand still at any position. The counterweight remains hooked to the thermal fuse and only closes the gate when the fuse fails.

WeightOf the sliding door: REI 120 approx. 50 kg/m² of wall opening.

NOTEAdditional accessories are usually dependent on the size dimensions of the gates

154

slid

ing

gat

es

REi 180 OnE-lEAVEd VERsiOn

In conformity with UNI 9723, the sliding gates series has the following features:

InstallationOn walls consisting of weight-bearing masonry.

Gate leavesMade of continuous modules of hollow-core sheet metal panels insulated with the appropriate materials. Assembly involves screwing the structure to pre-prepared horizon-tal profiles. Leaf thickness 140 mm.

Top guide trackFor horizontal sliding, made of press-folded steel with pre-drilled holes for attachment using plugs (not included). Overhead sliding on low friction carriages. The extension of the floor-mounted guide track beyond the opening en-sures the perpendicularity of the leaf. The top guide track is covered by a protection carter made of press-folded sheet metal.


CounterweightFor adjustable closure and protected by press-folded sheet metal carters, with counterstrike inset.



Identification plateMarking with reference information that is applied di-rectly to the handle.



Wall opening dimensionsMin. 600 x 500 mm, max. 6000 x 6000 mm(larger sizes on request).

Operation mode Of the gate series with thermal fuse:the gate can stand still at any position. The counterweight remains hooked to the thermal fuse and only closes the gate when the fuse fails.

WeightOf the sliding door: REI 180 approx. 75 kg/m² of wall opening

NOTE Additional accessories are usually dependent on the size dimensions of the gates



1015

300


Wal

l ope

ning

H

(min

. 500

)210

180

Weight-bearing beam in masonry orreinforced cement

FFL

230

Ope

ning

140

180

210

250* Wall opening L L + 250

51 51


155

slid

ing

gat

es

REi 120 TWO-lEAVEd VERsiOn

In conformity with UNI 9723, the sliding gates series has the following characteristics:

ApplicationOn weight-bearing masonry walls or insulated steel or in-sulated steel structure.

Gate leavesMade of continuous modules of hollow-core sheet metal panels insulated with the appropriate materials. Assembly involves screwing the structure to pre-prepared horizon-tal profiles. Leaf thickness 80 mm.

Top guide trackFor horizontal sliding, made of press-folded steel with pre-drilled holes for attachment using plugs (not in-cluded). Overhead sliding on low friction carriages. The extension of the floor-mounted guide track beyond the opening ensures the perpendicularity of the leaves. The top guide track is covered by a protection carter made of press-folded sheet metal.


CounterweightsFor adjustable closure and protected by press-folded sheet metal carters.

Door handlesRecessed on both sides of the leaves.

SealingThermo-expanding on all overlapping labyrinths and un-derneath the leaves.


FinishingWith a coat of paint thermoset in a 160 degree C furnace, light turquoise pastel color (similar to NCS4020-B50G).


Wall opening dimensions Min. 1200 x 500 mm, max. 8000 x 6000 mm(larger sizes on request).

Operation modeOf the gate series with thermal fuse:the leaves stand still at any position. The counterweights remain hooked to the related thermal fuse and only closes the gate when the fuse fails.

WeightOf the sliding door: REI 120 approx. 50 kg/m² of wall opening.

1015

300

Walls with a weight-bearing portion suited for attachment of the top guide track.

NB: Guide track gradient of 2 mm/mlAlso executable with unequal leaves

150

120

80

230

Wal

l ope

ning

H (m

in. 5

00)

FFL

Ope

ning

Weight-bearing beam

1/2 L + 350 min.* Wall opening L 1/2 L + 350 min.*

51 51

120

150




156

slid

ing

gat

es

OPERATiOn MOdE OF sliding FiRE gATEs WiTH OnE OR TWO lEAVEs

The selection of the holding system should reflect the cus-tomer’s worksite needs and the anti-fire project.

Operation mode of gates equipped with thermal fuse: The counterweight (1) does not load the gate and the operator (2) manually opens and closes the gates, which remains in the position it is left in. When the thermal fuse (3) is subjected to temperatures greater than 70° C, it breaks and causes the cable (4) to be released, so that the counterweight drags the gates to the closed position. The feed speed brake (5) prevents the gates from accelerat-ing during closure. The feed-in impact absorber (6) softens the final feed-in impact of the closure.

Operation mode of gates equipped with electromagnet:The counterweight (1) continuously loads the gate. The gate usually remains open, held in place by the electro-magnet (2). The counterweight closes the gate whenever the electromagnet lacks impulse current from the control unit or when the release button (3) is pressed. The feed speed brake (4) prevents the gate from accelerating dur-ing closure. The feed-in impact absorber (5) softens the fi-nal feed-in impact of the closure. The electromagnet must be connected with a power control unit and the related external smoke and heat detectors.

TOP gUidE TRACK Detail of the upper guide track for one and two-leaved sliding gates. The heights refer to wall openings which are

85

35

90

230

150

REI 120

1

6

45 3

Opening

2

NOTEThe thermal fuse is only triggered when the temperature in the immedi-ate vicinity rises above 70° C, and it does not respond to smoke. Its ap-plication, therefore, is not advisable when the gates are located outside the compartmentalization space and when a reaction to cold smoke is required.

3

2

1

5

4

Opening

Control unit and external RFC sensor

NOTEThe gate closes on impulse from a control unit controlled by an external RFC detector, thus permitting automatic closure at temperatures lower than 70° C as well in the presence of cold smoke. This means that the gate can be installed in any position, even outside the compartmentaliza-tion space.

perfectly vertically aligned, installed properly and should those values should be considered indicative.

85

35

90

230

210

REI 180

Operation modeSliding gates

157

slid

ing

gat

es

Optional accessoriesSliding gates

PAinTing

With ecologically formulated anti-corrosive epoxide prim-er. Minimum resistance to salt fog exposure: 300 hours (A.S.T.M. B - 117 - 61). Basic anti-corrosion coating: Light turquoise pastel. Optional: fi nishing with satin topcoats from the selection of furnace polymerized RAL colors.

Group 01:

Gates color: light turquoise pastel (similar to NCS4020B50G)

Group 02 (Basic anti-corrosion coating + satin topcoat finishing):

RAL 1001

RAL 1013

RAL 1015

RAL 3000

RAL 3003

RAL 3020

RAL 5010

RAL 5012

RAL 5015

RAL 5024

RAL 6000

RAL 6005

RAL 7001

RAL 7004

RAL 7011

RAL 7016

RAL 7024

RAL 7030

RAL 7032

RAL 7035

RAL 7037

RAL 7038

RAL 7040

RAL 7042

RAL 7047

RAL 8011

RAL 8017

RAL 8019

RAL 9001

RAL 9002

RAL 9005

RAL 9010

RAL 9011

RAL 9016

RAL 9018


Re-paintingFor re-painting, use the following procedure:-- sand and carefully wipe away any dust from the sur-

faces-- apply a base layer of opaque 2-component epoxide

we recommend EPOX product Nr. 5203 beige 0059 made by ALCEA in Milan

-- repaint the surfaces with your choice of lacquers or paints.


RAL 1004

RAL 1005

RAL 1006

RAL 1007

RAL 9006*

*Pre-approval of the sample is required.


RAL 1003

RAL 1012

RAL 1016

RAL 1021

RAL 1023

RAL 5002

Group 05 (Basic anti-corrosion coating only):

Basic anti-corrosion coating is available for all colors listed in group 02. In general, all RAL tints are useable except for: RAL 1018, RAL 5005 and RAL 9007

NOTEDue to artifacts of the printing process, the colors depicted here may not correspond exactly to the colors of actual doors. Please see the RAL or NCS samples.

RetouchingOn request, Ninz also provides touch-up paint (nitro/syn-thetic) in 1,00 kg cans in the necessary RAL tint.

ProtectionSince the gates are designed for internal usage, they should always be protected from atmospheric agents and direct sunlight. Exterior uses require paints that are specially designed for this type of use (on request).

ATTENTION External installation of gates require various measures for preventing prod-uct degradation, such as: 1. The gates should always be protected from bad weather. Permanent damage may result if water seeps inside the door leaf. Provide canopies or roofi ng to protect newly installed and existing products.2. Avoid darker colors for gates which will be exposed to direct sunlight. Sheet metal can heat up and cause warping of the door leaf which could compromise the functionality of the door itself.

158

slid

ing

gat

es

Clamp

Normal/special pulley tackles

Clamp

R pulley tackles

Mandatory accessoriesSliding gates

PUllEY TACKlEs FOR sElF-ClOsURE

Pulley tackles serve to ensure the full self-closure of sliding gates which are wider than they are tall.

Maximum width WITHOUT TACKLES: (H-800) x 2

Normal pulley tackles2 pulleys and standard counterweight box:-- for gates wider than (height H - 800) x 2 and shorter

than (height H - 800) x 4-- minimum space required on rebate side 250 mm-- for geared counterweight: required space on the

opening side L + 400 mm

Special pulley tackles2 pulleys and augmented counterweight box:-- for gates wider than (height H - 800) x 4 and shorter

than (height H - 1150) x 6-- minimum space required on rebate side 350 mm-- for geared counterweight: required space on the


R pulley tackles3 pulleys and larger counterweight box:-- for gates wider than (height H - 1150) x 6 and shorter

than L=7000 mm-- minimum space required on rebate side 350 mm-- for geared counterweight: required space on the


VT - VisCOTROlER®ACCidEnT PREVEnTiOn dEViCE

Gates should always be equipped with an automatic de-vice that controls the feed speed of the door during au-tomatic closing.After the critical moment when automated re-closure has been initiated, door speed increases progressively in proportion to opening time and door weight. During emergency situations, the energy that develops could cause serious injury/damage to people or objects within its range of motion. The hydraulic V.T. VISCOTROLLER® rotor makes it possible to set a constant closing speed in the range of 0.05 to 0,25 m/sec.

ATTENTIONFor purposes of accident prevention, gates should always be equipped with a feed-in brake to regulate closing speed. Customers who choose not to include the feed-in brake assume full responsibility for possible consequences.

159

slid

ing

gat

es

Mandatory and optional accessoriesSliding gates

Feed-in impact absorber

ATTENTION: be careful not to damage the impact absorber shaft

L/2 + 200 (Normal counterweight)L/2 + 350 (Geared counterweight)

H +

90

Position of the EM electric cable exit

Technical data for the CC600N electromagnet per leaf up to 12 m² of wall opening

primary power supply 24 V DCvoltage tolerance ± 10%nominal current 125 mAnominal power 3 Winsertion duration 100%withstand force approx. 61 Kg.operational temperature 0°C ÷ +50°Coperational temperature at 20°C 45°Cmagnetic residue null

Technical data for the CC1400N electromagnet per leaf up to 12 m² of wall opening

primary power supply 24 V DC

voltage tolerance ± 10%

nominal current 200 mA

nominal power 5 W

insertion duration 100%

withstand force approx. 143 Kg.

operational temperature 0°C ÷ +50°C

operational temperature at 20°C 60°C

magnetic residue null

EC marked in conformity with STANDARD EN 1155

FEEd-in iMPACT ABsORBER

Mandatory accessory for one- and two-leaved sliding gates. Compression energy on the shaft is absorbed by slowing the flow of a fluid by means of an adjustable limiter valve. The shock absorber of the shaft is re-armed when the gate is re-opened.

Tuning-

ElECTROMAgnETs

Gates operation mode with electromagnets (on request): the gate is usually left open. The counterweight is always hooked to the leaf and closure occurs whenever the electric current to the electromagnet is interrupted.For smoke/heat detection systems, control unit and power supply, see the dedicated page in the accessories doors sec-tion of the present brochure.

Electromagnet CC1400N

Electromagnet CC600N

-

160

slid

ing

gat

es


gEAREd REi 120 And REi 180 COUnTERWEigHTs

On request due to space limitations on the rebate side, sliding gates may also be supplied with geared and/or out-of-alignment counterweights. A 100 mm overlap of the leaf must be ensured regardless.While ordering, please specify whether the rebate is NOR-MAL or SPECIAL.

Wall opening L100

40L + 400* ~

Opposite-side counterweight version with normal rebate, REI 120 and REI 180

L + 400* ~

Wall opening L100

min.130

Opposite-side counterweight version with special rebate, REI 120 and REI 180

*Variable dimensions for larger-sized gates.

nORMAl/sPECiAl REBATE

100 The building of the additional apron after installation of the gates is the buyer's responsibility and duty

Normal rebate in the presence of a 90° wall

Wall opening L

L + 250 ~

100

Version with out-of-alignment REI 120 counterweight on the opposite side

Wall opening L

L + 250 ~

100

Out-of-alignment counterweight version, REI 120

1/2 L + 200 1/2 L + 200

100 Wall opening L 100

Two-leaved out-of-line counterweight version, REI 120

min.130

Special rebate in the absence of a 90° wall or any obstacles

161

slid

ing

gat

es

CROss BEAM And WEigHT-BEARing sTRUCTURE

Cross beam made of 100 x 200 mm insulated steel profiles for REI 120 one- or two-leaved sliding gates. Up to L = 2500 ready for lateral attachment, plus additional ceiling attachment for greater widths. Covering/finishing of the beam with 2 sheets of 12.5 mm plasterboard is the cus-tomer‘s responsibility.

Cross beam Example of weight-bearing structu res: static calculation of the structure is the customer‘s responsibility

(*) These profiles may also be used for the construction of a weight-bearing structure. Spaces between the various profiles outside of the span may be closed with any REI 120 wall type (plasterboard, panels, etc.)

inTERnAl nigHT lOCK

On request, Sliding gates may be equipped with night locks with cylinders to pass.Utilization of this type of mechanism with gates should be indicated while ordering.

EXTERnAl nigHT lOCK

The presence of external night lock on gates need not necessarily be indicated during the ordering phase, and is only useable from the side illustrated in the drawing.


(*)

Cross beam measuring100 x 200 mm

Two sheets of plasterboard sheets,12.5 mm thick each

Mineral wool 150 kg/mc

Lateral installation plate

Leaf of sliding gates

Ope

ning

Wal

l ope

ning

H

FFL

230

162

slid

ing

gat

es

PEdEsTRiAn dOOR

REI 120 sliding gates, with one or two leaves, may be equipped with a pedestrian door with or without a lower threshold. Pedestrian doors with thresholds and panic bars are not suitable for escape routes. The right or left opening direction should be specified by the customer during the ordering phase. By default pedestrian doors are inserted in the second panel, which is next to the pan-el with the handle. For additional information about the SLASH panic exit device, please see the dedicated pages in the panic exit device section of the present brochure.


Opening direction SLASH panic bar

Minimum gate dimensions required for insertion of pedestrian doors with or without threshold

Pedestrian door size

minimum FM dimensionsone leaved sliding gate two-leaved sliding gate

width850 1700 28001140 2000 3350

height with threshold

2090 2200*/2250** 2200*/2250**

height without threshold

2000 2450 2450

* opening on wall side** opening on side opposite the wall

Pedestrian door with threshold: If the FM H height lower to the measures listed, the height of the pedestrian door is reducedPedestrian doors used along escape routes are at the customer’s own risk!

VERTiCAl And HORiZOnTAl sHiMMing

Mandatory for gates with pedestrian doors equipped with panic bars and/or pedestrian doors towards the wall side.The counterweight box and the sliding leaf labyrinths are increased by 60 mm.

NOTEFor two-leaved sliding doors, vertical shimming should be calculated for both leaves.Shimming needs to be ordered separately.

ATTENTION*The plasterboard finishing (not included) should be installed on site after the guide track has been installed.

2000

8501140

One-leaved gates

2000

8501140

Two-leaved gates8898

With lower threshold Without lower threshold23

0

60 150

95

*

Pedestrian doorSliding gates

163

slid

ing

gat

es

OPEning OF PEdEsTRiAn dOOR TOWARds THE OPPOsiTE WAll WiTH THE HAndlE

Horizontal and vertical shimming is not necessary.

Wall opening L

Net pedestrian opening

FML + 250 ~250*

OPEning OF PEdEsTRiAn dOOR TOWARds THE OPPOsiTE WAll WiTH THE slAsH PAniC BAR

The horizontal and vertical shimming is mandatory.


FML + 250 ~250*

Wall opening L

OPEning OF PEdEsTRiAn dOOR TOWARds THE sAME WAll WiTH THE slAsH PAniC EXiT dEViCE

The horizontal and vertical shimming is mandatory.


FML + 250 ~250*

Wall opening L

ATTENTION The threshold version of the pedestrian door with a panic

150

230

150

230

98

Wal

l ope

ning

H (M

IN. 2

450

mm

)

W

all o

peni

ng H

H ha

ndle

100

0

H ha

ndle

107

8

60 150

230

98

60 150

230

Wal

l ope

ning

H (M

IN. 2

450

mm

)

H ha

ndle

100

0

H ha

ndle

107

8

Wal

l ope

ning

H

Wal

l ope

ning

H (M

IN. 2

450

mm

)

230

60 150

98

60 150

230

H ha

ndle

100

0

H ha

ndle

107

8

Wal

l ope

ning

H

bar is not suited for escape routes.

Pedestrian doorSliding gates

164

slid

ing

gat

es

sliding gATEs WiTH OnE lEAF

1. panel with handle2. intermediate panel3. fi nal panel4. Z overlapping labyrinth (wall)5. vertical L overlapping labyrinth (leaf posterior)6. horizontal L overlapping labyrinth (upper leaf)7. horizontal overlapping labyrinth underneath the guide track8. counterweight box9. guide track box10. sliding guide track11. lower tube12. upper tube13. 14. rebate profi le for NORMAL returned counterweight 15. rebate profi le for SPECIAL returned counterweight16. pair of lateral caps

17. feed-in impact absorber SAM18. VT feed speed braking device (brake line belt device)19. thermal fuse or electromagnet20. fl oor-mounted guide track21. counterweight plate 105x105 or 205x105 mm22. return pulley standard diam. 60 mm23. counterweight return pulley returned diam. 50 mm24. normal carriage diam. 75 mm25. double-grooved carriage for VT diam. 75 mm26. cable clamp27. cable28. guide-cover support29. rebate sealing 100 mm30. Recessed pair of handles31. End of guiding track device

Explosive components drawingSliding gates

Normal rebate Special rebate

Wall opening L

Wal

l ope

ning

H

165

slid

ing

gat

es

sliding gATEs WiTH TWO lEAVEs

1F.1M.2F.2M.3F.3M.4. Z overlapping labyrinth (wall) 5. vertical L overlapping labyrinth (leaf posterior)6. horizontal overlapping L labyrinth (upper leaf)7. horizontal overlapping labyrinth beneath the guide8. counterweight box9. guide cover10. sliding guide track

GENERAL NOTESAll rights reserved.No reproduction (partial or total) without prior authorization by Ninz.Ninz reserves the right to modify the product.

Installation should be executed by qualifi ed technicians.Modifi cations may only be made as indicated in the installation inst-ructions.Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.

Component positioningSliding gates

The "male" and "female" leaf position is not fixed, and the orientation depicted in the drawing may be inverted.

Wall opening L

Foro

mur

o H

11F.11M.12F.

12M.

lower tube for female leaflower tube for male leafupper tube for female leaf

panel with handle, female leafpanel with handle, male leafintermediate panel, female leafintermediate panel, male leaffi nal panel, female leaffi nal panel, male leaf

16. pair of lateral caps 17. afeed-in impact absorber SAM18. VT feed-in brake (brake line belt device)19. thermal fuse or electromagnet20. fl oor-mounted guide track21. counterweight plate 105x105 or 205x105 mm22. return pulley standard diam. 60 mm 24. normal carriage diam. 75 mm 25. double-grooved carriage for VT diam. 75 mm 26. cable clamp 27. cable 28. guide-cover support 30. molded pair of handles 31. L end of guiding track

upper tube for male leaf

tele

sco

pic

gat

es

“the ideal solution with minimal space requirements”


NINZ telescopic gatesFiRe DooRs

FEATURES 168

REI 120 MONOLATERAL GATES 169

REI 120 BILATERAL GATES 170

OPERATION MODE 171

OPTIONAL - MANDATORY ACCESSORIES 172 - 175

168

tele

sco

pic

gat

es

Mono-lateral telescopic gates available in class:

REI 60 REI 90REI 30

left opening direction – mono-lateral telescopic gates

right opening direction – mono-lateral telescopic gates

Bilateral telescopic gates

ATTENTIONFire compartmentalization elements should always be used properly. They are only designed for installation in spaces and constructions that are vertically aligned and flush.Compartmentalization for interiors is for areas that are not subject to strong air currents. Installation to be executed by specialized techni-cians only. For special applications consult with our technical office.The holding system for the gate is chosen by the customer to conform with their own worksite needs and the anti-fire design (thermal fuse or electromagnet).

FeaturesTelescopic gates

WHAt DeFiNes tHeM?

REI120 telescopic fire rated gates are available as horizon-tal sliding doors.The field of use includes large openings and/or special us-age conditions in customer-specified dimensions. Gates are supplied with leaves made of flush insulated sheet metal panes, sliding guides, protective carters, counter-weights, thermal fuses or electromagnets and finished in a base coat or RAL colors, plus other accessories as re-quired for correct product functioning.

StandardsThe gates are certified in accordance with UNI 9723 stand-ards in compliance with the current ministerial provisions in force.

Opening directionOpening direction needs to be indicated while placing the order.

left opening direction – mono-lateral telescopic gates

right opening direction – mono-lateral telescopic gatesBilateral telescopic gates available in class:

REI 60 REI 90REI 30

NOTEFire rated gates require careful design which reflects their dimensions and special functions. Every installation site should be measured and checked for vertical alignment of the walls and gradients of the floor-ing. Particular care must be taken to check for protrusions or blockages that might hinder the operation or free movement of the gates. Given the considerable weight of gates, the bearing capacity of the walls and crossbeams involved should be checked for the mounting of top guide tracks and overlapping labyrinths.

169

tele

sco

pic

gat

es

Rei 120 MoNolAteRAl VeRsioN WitH tWo leAVes

In conformity with UNI 9723 for two leaves, the telescopic mono-lateral gates series has the following characteristics:

InstallationOn weight-bearing masonry walls or ceilings.

Gates leavesMade of continuous panels of hollow-core sheet metal insulated with appropriate materials. Assembly involves screwing the structure to pre-prepared horizontal pro-fi les. Leaf thickness 80 mm.

Top guide trackFor horizontal sliding, made of press-folded steel with pre-drilled holes for attachment using plugs (not included). Over-head sliding on low friction carriages. The extension of the fl oor-mounted guide track beyond the opening ensures the perpendicularity of the leaf. The top guide track is covered by a protection carter made of press-folded sheet metal.


CounterweightFor adjustable closure and protected by press-folded sheet metal carters, with counterstrike inset and shimming inset.

Door handlesRecessed on both sides of the fi rst leaf.


Identifi cation plateMarking with reference information that is applied di-rectly to the handle.


PackagingModules on disposable metal container.

Wall opening dimensionsOn request as shown in the table to the side (smaller and larger sizes on request).

Operation modeOf the gate series with thermal fuse: the gate can stand still at any position. The counterweight remains hooked to the thermal fuse and only closes the gate when the fuse fails.

WeightFor the telescopic gates, approx. 50 kg/m² of wall opening




1015

300


Wall opening L

L/2 + 250 min250*

260


FFL

260

220

230

Wal

l ope

ning

H

510050004900480047004600450044004300420041004000390038003700360035003400330032003100300029002800270026002500240023002200210020001900

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

4100

4200

4300

4400

4500

4600

4700

4800

4900

5000

5100

5200

5300

5400

5500

5600

5700

5800

5900

6000

6100

field of application price list

Wall opening L

Wal

l ope

ning

H

170

tele

sco

pic

gat

es

Rei 120 BilAteRAl VeRsioN WitH FoUR leAVes

Conforms with UNI 9723 for four leaves, the telescopic bi-lateral gates series has the following features:

InstallationOn weight-bearing masonry walls or ceilings.

Gate leavesFour leaves made of continuous modules of hollow-core sheet metal panels insulated with the appropriate materials. Assembly involves screwing the structure to pre-prepared horizontal hollow metal profi le. Leaf thickness 80 mm.

Top guide trackDouble-guide for horizontal sliding made of press-folded steel with pre-drilled holes for attachment using plugs (not included). Overhead sliding on low friction carriages. The extension of the fl oor-mounted guide track beyond the opening ensures the perpendicularity of the leaves. The top guide track is covered by a protection carter made of press-folded sheet metal.

Overlapping labyrinthsMade of press-folded sheet metal.

CounterweightsFor adjustable closure and protected by press-folded sheet metal carters, with for the counterstrike and shimming insets.

Door handlesRecessed on both sides of the fi rst two leaves.

SealingThermo-expanding on all overlapping labyrinths and un-derneath the leaves.

Identifi cation plateMarking with reference information that is applied direct-ly to one of the handles.


PackagingModules on disposable metal container.

Wall opening dimensionsOn request as shown in the table to the side (smaller and larger measures available on request).

Operation modeOf the gate series with thermal fuse: the gate can stand still at any position. The counterweight remains hooked to the thermal fuse and only closes the gate when the fuse fails.

WeightFor the telescopic gates, approx. 50 kg/m² of wall opening



Walls with weight-bearing zones are suitable for attachment of the sliding guide

1015

300


150*

L/4 +320 min*

150*

L/4 +320 min*

Wall opening L


FFL

260

220

230

Wal

l ope

ning

H

44004300420041004000390038003700360035003400330032003100300029002800270026002500240023002200210020001900

3200

3300

3400

3500

3600

3700

3800

3900

4000

4100

4200

4300

4400

4500

4600

4700

4800

4900

5000

5100

5200

5300

5400

5500

5600

5700

5800

5900

6000

6100

6200

6300

6400

6500

6600

field of application price list

Wall opening L

171

tele

sco

pic

gat

es

Operation modeTelescopic gates

opeRAtioN MoDe oF telescopic FiRe GAtes

The selection of the holding system should reflect the cus-tomer’s worksite needs and the anti-fire project.

Operation mode of gates equipped with thermal fuse:The counterweight (1) does not load the gate and the operator (2) manually opens and closes the gates, which remains in the position it is left in. When the thermal fuse (3) is subjected to temperatures greater than 70° C, it breaks and causes the cable (4) to be released, so that the counterweight drags the gates to the closed position. The feed speed brake (5) prevents the gates from accelerat-ing during closure. The feed-in impact absorber (6) softens the final feed-in impact of the closure.

Operation mode of gates with electromagnet:The counterweight (1) continuously loads the gate. The gate usually remains open, held in place by the electro-magnet (2). The counterweight closes the gate whenever the electromagnet lacks impulse current from the control unit or when the release button (3) is pressed. The feed speed brake (4) prevents the gate from accelerating dur-ing closure. The feed-in impact absorber (5) softens the fi-nal feed-in impact of the closure. The electromagnet must be connected with a power control unit and the related external smoke and heat detectors.

iNstAllAtioN

Frontal installation

230

230

Wal

l O

pen

ing

H

260

1

6

45 3

Opening

2

NOTEThe thermal fuse is only triggered when the temperature in the immedi-ate vicinity rises above 70° C, and it does not respond to smoke. Its ap-plication, therefore, is not advisable when the gates are located outside the compartmentalization space and when a reaction to cold smoke is required.

3

2

1

5

4

Opening

Control unit and external RFC sensor

NOTEThe gate closes on impulse from a control unit controlled by an exter-nal RFC detector, thus permitting automatic closure at temperatures lower than 70° C as well in the presence of cold smoke. This means that the gate can be installed in any position, even outside the com-partmentalization space.

Ceiling attachment

260

3010422 104

Wal

l Op

enin

g H

230

172

tele

sco

pic

gat

es

Optional accessoriesTelescopic gates

pAiNtiNG


Group 01:

Gates color: light turquoise pastel (similar to NCS4020B50G)


RAL 1001

RAL 1013

RAL 1015

RAL 3000

RAL 3003

RAL 3020

RAL 5010

RAL 5012

RAL 5015

RAL 5024

RAL 6000

RAL 6005

RAL 7001

RAL 7004

RAL 7011

RAL 7016

RAL 7024

RAL 7030

RAL 7032

RAL 7035

RAL 7037

RAL 7038

RAL 7040

RAL 7042

RAL 7047

RAL 8011

RAL 8017

RAL 8019

RAL 9001

RAL 9002

RAL 9005

RAL 9010

RAL 9011

RAL 9016

RAL 9018


RAL 1004

RAL 1005

RAL 1006

RAL 1007

RAL 9006*



RAL 1003

RAL 1012

RAL 1016

RAL 1021

RAL 1023

RAL 5002

Group 05 (Basic anti-corrosion coating only):

Basic anti-corrosion coating is available for all colors listed in group 02.In general, all RAL tints are useable except for: RAL 1018, RAL 5005 and RAL 9007




ATTENTIONExternal installation of gates require various measures for preventing product degradation, such as: 1. The gates should always be protected from bad weather. Permanent damage may result if water seeps inside the door leaf. Provide canopies or roofi ng to protect newly installed and existing products.2. Avoid darker colors for gates which will be exposed to direct sunlight. Sheet metal can heat up and cause warping of the door leaf which could compromise the functionality of the door itself.

CleaningWater and neutral soap are recommended for the regu-lar cleaning of our products. Do not use common cleaning products (see detergents) and/or other solvents. We shall not be held responsible for any problems that arise if these guidelines are not respected.

Re-paintingFor re-painting, use the following procedure: - sand and carefully wipe away any dust from the sur-

faces - apply a base layer of opaque 2-component epoxide


- repaint the surfaces with your choice of lacquers or paints.

173

tele

sco

pic

gat

es

Clamp

Normal/special pulley tackles

Clamp

R pulley tackles

Mandatory accessoriesTelescopic gates

pUlleY tAcKles FoR selF-closURe

Pulley tackles serve to ensure the full self-closure of tel-escopic gates which are wider than they are tall.

Maximum width WITHOUT TACKLES: (H-800) x 2

Normal pulley tackles2 pulleys and standard counterweight box: - for gates wider than (height H - 800) x 2 and shorter than

(height H - 800) x 4 - minimum space required on rebate side 250 mm - for geared counterweight: required space on the open-

ing side L + 400 mm

Special pulley tackles2 pulleys and augmented counterweight box: - for gates wider than (height H - 800) x 4 and shorter than

(height H - 1150) x 6 - minimum space required on rebate side 350 mm - for geared counterweight: required space on the open-

ing side L + 500 mm

R pulley tackles3 pulleys and larger counterweight box: - for gates wider than (height H - 1150) x 6 and shorter

than L=7000 mm - minimum space required on rebate side 350 mm - for geared counterweight: required space on the


Vt - ViscotRoleR®AcciDeNt pReVeNtioN DeVice

Gates should always be equipped with an automatic de-vice that controls the feed speed of the door during au-tomatic closing.After the critical moment when automated re-closure has been initiated, door speed increases progressively in pro-portion to opening time and door weight. During emer-gency situations, the energy that develops could cause se-rious injury/damage to people or objects within its range of motion. The hydraulic V.T. VISCOTROLLER® rotor makes it possible to set a constant closing speed in the range of 0.05 to 0,25 m/sec.

ATTENTION For purposes of accident prevention, gates should always be equipped with a feed-in brake to regulate closing speed. Customers who choose not to include the feed-in brake assume full responsibility for possible conse-quences.

174

tele

sco

pic

gat

es

Feed-in impact absorber

ATTENTION: be careful not to damage the impact absorber shaft

L/2 + 200 (Normal counterweight)L/2 + 350 (Delayed counterweight)

H +

90

Position of the EM electric cable exit

Technical data for the CC600N electromagnet per leaf for up to 12 m² of wall opening


Technical data for the CC1400N electromagnet per leaf for more than 12 m² of wall opening



Mandatory and optional accessoriesTelescopic gates

FeeD-iN iMpAct ABsoRBeR

Mandatory accessory for one- and two-leaved telescopic gates. The compression energy on the shaft is absorbed by slowing the flow of a fluid by means of an adjustable limiter valve. The shock absorber of the shaft is re-armed when the gates is re-opened.

Tuning

electRoMAGNets

Gates operation mode with electromagnets (on request): the gate is usually left open. The counterweight is always hooked to the leaf and closure occurs whenever the electric current to the electromagnet is interrupted.For smoke/heat detection systems, control unit and power supply, see the dedicated page in the accessories doors sec-tion of the present brochure.

ElectromagnetCC1400N

ElectromagnetCC600N

175

tele

sco

pic

gat

es

Optional accessoriesTelescopic gates

GeAReD Rei 120 MoNolAteRAl telescopic GAtes

On request due to space limitations on the rebate side, slid-ing gates may also be supplied with geared and/or out-of-alignment counterweights.

Wall opening L

FM L /2 + 400* ~

111

100

*

40

Counterweight version, opposite side with normal rebate

*After the gate has been installed, building of the additional apron is the buyer’s responsibility and duty

iNteRNAl NiGHt locK

On request, telescopic gates may be equipped with night locks with cylinders to pass.Utilization of this type of mechanism with gates should be indicated while ordering.

cRoss BeAMs

Cross beam made of 100 x 200 mm insulated hollow metal profile for REI 120 one- or two-leaved telescopic gates. Up to L = 2500 ready for lateral attachment, plus additional ceiling attachment for greater widths. Covering/finishing of the beam with 2 sheets of 12.5 mm plasterboard is the customer’s responsibility.

Cross beams

GENERAL NOTESAll rights reserved.No reproduction (partial or total) without prior authorization by Ninz.Ninz reserves the right to modify the product.Installation should be executed by qualified technicians.Modifications may only be made as indicated in the installation in-structions.Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.

A 100 mm overlap of the leaf must be ensured regardless. While ordering, please specify whether the rebate is NOR-MAL or SPECIAL.

Wall opening L

FM L /2 + 400* ~

111

100

Counterweight version, opposite side with special rebate

Cross beammeasuring

100 x 200mm

Two sheets of plasterboard

sheets, 12.5 mmthick each

Mineral wool 150 kg/mc

Lateralattachment plate

Leaf oftelescopic gate

Ope

ning

Wal

l ope

ning

H23

0

FFL

“simple solutions for complex needs”

NINZ hinged gatesFiRe dOORS

Gates with hollow metal profi le frames

FEATURES 184 - 186

ENCUMBRANCES AND APPLICATIONS 187 - 188

MANDATORY - OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 189 - 191

Gates with angular metal profi le frames

FEATURES 192 - 193

ENCUMBRANCES AND APPLICATIONS 194 - 195

MANDATORY - OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 196 - 199


184

Hin

ged

gat

es

Hinged one-leaved gate with hollow metal profile frame:

REI 60 REI 90REI 30

Hinged two-leaved gate with hollow metal profile frame:

REI 60 REI 90REI 30

FeaturesHinged gates with hollow metal profi le frames

WHAT deFineS THeM?

The fi eld of use includes large openings and/or special us-age conditions in customer-specifi ed dimensions. Gates are supplied with leaves made of fl ush insulated sheets of metal panes, jointed and attached to each other with screws, “L”-profi le hollow metal frames on three sides and fi nished with a base coat or RAL tints and other acces-sories as required for proper functioning of the product.

StandardsThe gates are certifi ed in accordance with UNI 9723 stand-ards in compliance with the current ministerial provisions in force.

Opening direction, pullOpening direction needs to be specifi ed while ordering.

Left Right

NOTEFire rated gates require careful design which refl ects their dimensions and special functions. Every installation site should be measured and checked for vertical alignment of the walls and gradients of the fl oor-ing. Given the considerable weight of gates, the bearing capacity of the walls should also be checked.

ATTENTiONGates are supplied as a single pre-assembled unit, which should be kept in mind for purposes of handling. The customer assumes all risks entailed by the use of Hinged gates along escape routes.

Fire compartmentalization elements should always be used properly. They are only designed for installation in spaces and constructions that are vertically aligned and fl ush.Compartmentalization for interiors is for areas that are not subject to strong air currents. Installation to be executed by specialized techni-cians only. For special applications consult with our technical offi ce.

185

Hin

ged

gat

es

Rei 120 One-LeAVed VeRSiOn

This hinged gates series has the following features:

ApplicationFor masonry walls, use plugs inside the span and corner steel outside the span (to be specifi ed while ordering).

Door leafLeaf unit made of continuous modules of hollow-core sheet metal panels insulated with appropriate materials, without lower rebate. Leaf thickness 72 mm. Nr. 2 extra-strong hinges for each leaf.

DoorframeMade of galvanize “L”-shaped hollow metal profi les.

HingesNr. 2 extra-strong hinges.

SealingThermo-expansive, inserted into the leaf rebate.

Door handleAccident-prevention shape, made of stainless steel with a double lever with return spring and set of plates.Handle height = 1050 mm.

Lock marked lock with cylinder to pass.

Identifi cation plateMarking with reference information that is applied to the leaf’s rebate.


PackagingLeaf unit on disposable metal container.

Wall opening dimensionsMin. 1000 X 1750 mm, max. 5000 X 2500 mm, larger sizes on request.

Mandatory accessories1 -marked door closer per leaf.

Maximum opening120° with door closer only, and 110° additional coil spring.

WeightGate weight, approx. 60 kg/m² of wall opening.

Vertical section for installation with block frame

Order measurements L

Doorframe opening = L - 200 100100

Detail of panel jointsDetail of section for installation with block frame

90

30

72

FeaturesHinged gates with hollow metal profi le frames

186

Hin

ged

gat

es

Vertical section for installation with block frame


90

30

100


Order measurements L (L1 + L2)

72

FeaturesHinged gates with hollow metal profile frames

Rei 120 TWO-LeAVed VeRSiOn

This two-leaved vertically sliding gates series has the follow-ing features:

InstallationFor masonry walls, use plugs inside the span and corner steel outside the span (to be specified while ordering).

Door leafLeaf unit made of continuous modules of hollow-core sheet metal panels insulated with appropriate materials, without lower rebate. Leaf thickness 72 mm. Unequal divisions avail-able on request.

DoorframeMade of galvanized “L”-shaped hollow metal profiles.

HingesNr. 2 extra-strong hinges for each leaf.



LockActive (main) leaf: marked lock with cylinder to passSecondary leaf: “Flush-bolt” lock for automatic upper and lower blocking of the leaf.

Identification plateMarking with reference information that is applied to the rebate of one of the leaves.

FinishingWith a base coat thermoset in a 160 degree C furnace colorturquoise pastel, light tone (similar to NCS4020-B50G).


Wall opening dimensionsMin. 2000 X 1750 mm, max. 5000 X 5000 mm, larger sizes on request.Minimum division: 1000 mm.

Mandatory accessories1 door closer per leaf and 1 closing regulator for proper se-quencing of leaf closure.

Maximum opening120° with door closer only, and 110° additional coil spring.


187

Hin

ged

gat

es

Installations and encumbrancesHinged one-leaved gate with hollow metal profile frame

One-LeAVed inSTALLATiOn On BLOCK FRAMe

100

*

Order measurement L

100

*

100

Doorframe exterior = L - 20

*

Doorframe opening = L - 200

*After the gate has been installed, the building of the additional apron is the buyer’s responsibility and duty

One-LeAVed inSTALLATiOn BeYOnd THe ReVeAL On BLOCK FRAMe

Order measurement L

Doorframe exterior = L + 40


One-LeAVed dOOR enCUMBRAnCeS WiTH 90° OPening

Order measurement L

Door closer70 mm protrusion

Coil spring protrusion 70 mm

EXUSpanic barsprotrusion 125 mm

Door handleprotrusion 75 mm


90 10

44

64

70

188

Hin

ged

gat

es

Installations and encumbrancesHinged two-leaved gates with hollow metal profile frames

TWO-LeAVed inSTALLATiOn in THe ReVeAL

100

*


* *

Order measurement L (L1 + L2)

*After the gate has been installed, the building of the additional apron is the buyer’s responsibility and duty

TWO-LeAVed inSTALLATiOn BeYOnd THe ReVeAL


90

30

100


Order measurements L (L1 + L2)

72

TWO-LeAVed dOOR enCUMBRAnCeS WiTH 90° OPening

Order measurement L

Door closer70 mm protrusion

Coil spring protrusion 70 mm

EXUS panic bars protrusion 125 mm



90 10

44

64

70

7064

L2 = secondary leaf section L1 = active leaf section

L2 +

100

189

Hin

ged

gat

es

Mandatory accessoriesHinged gates with hollow metal profi le frames

TS93 dOOR CLOSeR

Door closer (1) with slide channel for large sizes, with regu-lation of opening force, closing velocity and fi nal closure. Silver color.

EC certification 0432-BPR 0008 EN 1154:1996 + A1:2002

SR390 CLOSing RegULATOR

To ensure automatic closure of two-leaved fi re rated gates, a door closing regulation is mandatory. The two-leaved gates door series, therefore, is provided with a Dorma SR 390 closing regulator (2), equipped with feed-in impact absorber and all mechanical functioning, mounted visibly on the doorframe. Silver-colored galvanized fi nish-ing, for on-site installation.

EC certification 0432-BPR 0026 EN 1158:1997+A1:2002

COiL SPRing

Coil spring (3) for large sized Leaves to reinforce the door closer, with mechanical functioning and positioned high up on the hinge-side of the leaf (pull-side of the door). The steel tension cable is attached to the cross beam of the doorframe. Finished in the same color as the door leaf (except for replacements).

NOTEThe accessories require assembly.

190

Hin

ged

gat

es

Optional accessoriesHinged gates with hollow metal profi le frames

PAinTing


Group 01:

Gate color: light turquoise pastel (similar to NCS4020B50G)


RAL 1001

RAL 1013

RAL 1015

RAL 3000

RAL 3003

RAL 3020

RAL 5010

RAL 5012

RAL 5015

RAL 5024

RAL 6000

RAL 6005

RAL 7001

RAL 7004

RAL 7011

RAL 7016

RAL 7024

RAL 7030

RAL 7032

RAL 7035

RAL 7037

RAL 7038

RAL 7040

RAL 7042

RAL 7047

RAL 8011

RAL 8017

RAL 8019

RAL 9001

RAL 9002

RAL 9005

RAL 9010

RAL 9011

RAL 9016

RAL 9018


RAL 1004

RAL 1005

RAL 1006

RAL 1007

RAL 9006*



RAL 1003

RAL 1012

RAL 1016

RAL 1021

RAL 1023

RAL 5002

in general, all RAL tints are useable except for: RAL 1018, RAL 5005 and RAL 9007




ATTENTiON External installation of gates require various measures for preventing product degradation, such as: 1. The gates should always be protected from bad weather. Permanent damage may result if water seeps inside the door leaf. Provide cano-pies or roofi ng to protect newly installed and existing products.2. Avoid darker colors for gates which will be exposed to direct sun-light. Sheet metal can heat up and cause warping of the door leaf which could compromise the functionality of the door itself.

CleaningWater and neutral soap are recommended for the regu-lar cleaning of our products. Do not use common cleaning products (see detergents) and/or other solvents. We shall not be held responsible for any problems that arise if these guidelines are not respected.

Re-paintingFor re-painting, use the following procedure: - sand and carefully wipe away any dust from the

surfaces - apply a base layer of opaque 2-component epoxide

- we recommend EPOX product Nr. 5203 beige 0059 made by ALCEA in Milan


191

Hin

ged

gat

es

Optional accessoriesHinged gates with hollow metal profi le frames

CC600n And CC1400 n WALL-MOUnTed eLeC-TROMAgneTS WiTH STRiKe PLATe AnCHORS

For smoke/heat detection systems, central control units and power supply, see the dedicated page in the acces-sories section of the present brochure.

Technical data for the CC600N electromagnet per leaves up to 5 m² of wall opening with a maximum leaf width of 1700 mm

primary power supply 24 Vcc



nominal power 3 W






Technical data for the CC1400N electromagnet for leaves up to 5 m² of wall opening or with leaf width greater than 1700 mm

primary power supply 24 Vcc



nominal power 5 W






NOTEPosition the anchor 200 mm from the external edge of the leaf and as far as possible from the hinges.EC marked in conformity with STANDARD EN 1155

eXUS LP/LA/LX PAniC BARS

For more information, please see the “EXUS panic bars” section of the present brochure. Certifi cation: suited for one-leaved gates or the active and secondary leaves of two-leaved gates with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/leaf and masses of 300 kg/leaf. Height of central bar, 955 mm from the fi nished fl oor surface.

65

70

192

Hin

ged

gat

es

Hinged two-leaved gate with angular frame:

REI 60 REI 90REI 30

FeaturesHinged gates with angular frames

WHAT deFineS THeM?

The field of use includes large openings and/or special us-age conditions in customer-specified dimensions. Gates are supplied with leaves made of flush insulated sheets of metal panes jointed and soldered together, “Z”-profile hollow metal frames on three sides and finished with a base coat or RAL tints and other accessories as required for proper functioning of the product.


Opening direction, pullOpening direction needs to be specified while ordering.

Left Right

NOTEFire rated gates require careful design which reflects their dimensions and special functions. Every installation site should be measured and checked for vertical alignment of the walls and gradients of the floor-ing. Given the considerable weight of gates, the bearing capacity of the walls should also be checked.

ATTENTiONGates are supplied as a single pre-assembled unit, which should be kept in mind for purposes of handling. The customer assumes all risks entailed by the use of Hinged gates along escape routes.

Fire compartmentalization elements should always be used properly. They are only designed for installation in spaces and constructions that are vertically aligned and flush.Compartmentalization for interiors is for areas that are not subject to strong air currents. Installation to be executed by specialized techni-cians only. For special applications consult with our technical office.

Left Right

193

Hin

ged

gat

es

Door

fram

e op

enin

g =

H -

50

Door

fram

e ex

terio

r = H

+ 4

0

Wal

l ope

ning

HCustomer is responsible for the ma-sonry work



Wall opening L (L1 + L2)

= L1 - 85

72

50

38

Doorframe exterior= L + 80

Wall opening L

27

40

Customer is responsible for the masonry work

FeaturesHinged gates with angular frames

Rei 120 TWO-LeAVed VeRSiOn

This hinged gates has the following characteristics:

ApplicationOn masonry walls with frame to be cemented or with frame attached to a subframe with plasterboard finishing.

Door leavesLeaf unit made of continuous modules of hollow-core sheet metal panels insulated with the appropriate materi-als, without lower rebate. Leaf thickness 73 mm. Unequal divisions available on request.

DoorframeMade of galvanized sheet metal with a “Z”-shaped profile.

HingesNr. 2 extra-strong drain-type hinges for each leaf.



LockActive (main) leaf: -marked lock with cylinder to passSecondary leaf: “Flush-bolt” lock for automatic upper and lower blocking of the leaf.

Identification plateMarking with reference information that is applied to the rebate of one of the leaves.

FinishingWith thermoset epoxy-polyester powders, with orange skin anti-scratch finishing, turquoise pastel color - light tone (NCS4020-B50G) for gates maximum H = 4500 mm. Anti-rust coating, light tone turquoise pastel for gates with height H greater than 4500 mm.


Dimensions L x HMin. 2000 X 1750 mm, max. 5000 X 5000 mm, larger sizes on request.Minimum division: 1000 mm.

Mandatory accessories1 door closer per leaf and 1 closing regulator for proper sequencing of leaf closure.

Maximum opening120° with door closer only.


194

Hin

ged

gat

es

Installation Hinged two-leaved gates with angular frames

SUBFRAMe-MOUnTed dOORFRAMe

Ord

er m

easu

rem

ent

H

Spac

e to

cre

ate

= H

+ 5

0

Door

fram

e op

enin

g =

H -

50

* *

10050

Door

fram

e ex

terio

r = H

+ 4

0

Order measurement L (L1 + L2)


50

50

50 50

= L1 - 85


Space to create = L + 100

** *

*

72

*Subframe 50x50 and plasterboard finishing are the customer’s re-sponsibility unless ordered separately.

dOORFRAMe FOR eMBedding in MASOnRY

Door

fram

e op

enin

g =

H -

50

Door

fram

e ex

terio

r = H

+ 4

0

Wal

l ope

ning

H

Customer is responsible for the ma-sonry work



Wall opening L (L1 + L2)

= L1 - 85

72

195

Hin

ged

gat

es

EncumbrancesHinged two-leaved gates with angular frames

TWO-LeAVed dOOR enCUMBRAnCeS WiTH 90° OPening

Order measurements L50 50


L2 = secondary leaf section L1 = active leaf section

Door closer protrusion 62 mm

EXUSpanic bar protrusion 125 mm


Chiudiporta sporgenza 82 mm

43

196

Hin

ged

gat

es

304

75

298

62

480

128

79

35

EC Certification 0432-BPR 0109.02 EN 1158:1997/A1:2004/04

NOTEThe accessories require assembly.

Mandatory accessoriesHinged gates with angular frames

dS-RYOBi 3550 dOOR CLOSeR

The DS RYOBI door closer has a 2 to 6 force range that can be adjusted by means of a convenient external tun-ing screw, is ambidextrous and is available with different accessories and color choices. It comes with an ABS design cover with a standard scissor arm.It is also available with slide-channel, which requires or-dering the D-3550T series door closer.The D-3550 door closer has two screws for separate regu-lation of the closing speed and the feed-in speed increase. It is also equipped with a regulator screw for deceleration while opening, to avoid shocks to the door, and a regula-tor screw for delaying the initiation of the closing cycle.

DS RYOBI D-3550 door closers are guaranteed for 2,000,000 operational cycles, and are certified for use with fire doors BS476 part 22/87 ANSI A 156.4 grade 1 UL and ADA, and as further assurance of their quality they are also marked 1720-CPD-0001 Rev A in accordance with EN 1154.

SR90 CLOSing RegULATOR

To ensure automatic closure of two-leaved fire rated gates, a door closing regulators obligatory. The two-leaved fire gates series, therefore, is provided with a Dictator SR90 closing regulator, equipped with feed-in impact absorber and all-mechanical functioning, mounted visibly on the doorframe. Silver-colored galvanized finishing and for on-site installation.

VS 2000 SHOCK ABSORBeR

For large doors to soften the final shock of door closure, positioned on the hinge-side of the leaf. Thestrike plate is attached to the doorframe.

168

53

52

Door leaf

Doorframe

197

Hin

ged

gat

es

Optional accessoriesHinged gates with angular frames

eLeCTROMAgneT 70 Kg WALL-MOUnTed WiTH STRiKe PLATe

EM wall-mounted electromagnet with white plastic casing and unlock button. Anchor consisting of a nickel-plated plate and jointed baseboard.

Technical data

power supply 24 Vcc

absorption 67 mA

minimum withstand force approx. 71 kg

eXUS LP/LA/LX PAniC BARS

For more information, please see the “EXUS panic bars” section of the present brochure. Certification: suited for one-leaved gates and the active and secondary leaves of two-leaved gates with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/leaf and masses of 300 kg/leaf.Height of central bar, 955 mm from finished floor surface.

PedeSTRiAn dOOR

REI 120 two-leaved hinged gate with angular doorframes can be equipped with pedestrian doors with a lower threshold. The right or left opening direction should be chosen by the customer and indicated while ordering. The pedestrian door series is for insertion into the secondary leaf. It opens towards the hinge-side of the gate and can be equipped with a window, on request.For additional information concerning the EXUS panic exit device, please see the dedicated pages in the panic exit device section of the present brochure.

Minimum dimensions (L2 and FM H) for the insertion of pedestrian doors:

Pedestrian door size minimum dimensions

width 900 L2 > 1680

width 1140 L2 > 1980

height 2000 FMH > 2230

ATTENTiONThe threshold makes pedestrian doors with panic bars unsuitable for escape routes.

25

102

70

65

53

65


1140900

198

Hin

ged

gat

es

STAndARd TinTS WiTH nO PRiCe SUPPLeMenT

Interior painting with epoxy-polyester powders in tur-quoise pastel - light tone (NCS4020- B50G). The tonalities of the frame and the door leaf are represented in the photo to the side

SPeCiAL TinTS WiTH PRiCe SUPPLeMenT

Interior paints (groups 02 and 03) available in a variety of RAL tints with epoxy-polyester powders.

Distinct from other RALs, metallic tinted paints RAL 9006, RAL 9007 (group 3) and RAL 9006 E (group 04) present a fi nish with a wrinkled structure that requires pre-approval of a sample.

Group 02:

RAL 1013

RAL 1015

RAL 5010

RAL 5024

RAL 6000

RAL 7016

RAL 7024

RAL 7035

RAL 7038

RAL 8011

RAL 9001

RAL 9002

RAL 9010

RAL 9011

RAL 9016

RAL 9018

Group 03:

RAL 1001

RAL 1003

RAL 3000

RAL 3003

RAL 3020

RAL 5012

RAL 5015

RAL 6005

RAL 7001

RAL 7004

RAL 7011

RAL 7030

RAL 7032

RAL 7037

RAL 7040

RAL 7042

RAL 7047

RAL 8017

RAL 8019

RAL 9005

RAL 9006*

RAL 9007*

*requires pre-approval of a sample.

PaintingHinged gates with angular frames

PaintingThe hinged gates series of gates is painted with thermoset powders, with anti-scratch fi nish and semi-glossy embossing (except for certain colors). The paint is especially resistant and offers a pleasant fi nish for interior applications. Choose from a wide range of RAL colors.

199

Hin

ged

gat

es

PaintingHinged gates with angular frames

SPeCiAL TinTS FOR eXTeRiOR USe WiTH PRiCe SUPPLeMenTS

Exterior painting with polyester powders in various RAL tints.

SPeCiAL TinTS BY ReQUeST WiTH PRiCe SUPPLeMenTS

Painting available for interior and exterior with epoxy-polyester and polyester (respectively) powders in the requested RAL tints. Group 05 does not include special colors, such as metallic, mica, smooth or wrinkled texture and other sample tints like Pantone, NCS, etc.


RiverniciaturaIn caso di riverniciatura procedere come segue: - carteggiare e spolverare accuratamente le superfi ci - applicare una mano di fondo epossidico opaco a 2

componenti, proponiamo il prodotto EPOX nr. 5203 colore beige 0059 della ditta ALCEA di Milano.

- riverniciare le superfi ci con smalti o pittura a propria scelta.

WARNiNG!External installation of gates require various measures for preventing product degradation, such as:1. The gates should always be protected from bad weather. Permanent damage may result if water seeps inside the door leaf. Provide cano-pies or roofi ng to protect newly installed and existing products.

GENERAL NOTESAll rights reserved.No reproduction (partial or total) without prior authorization by Ninz.Ninz reserves the right to modify the product.Installation should be executed by qualifi ed technicians.Modifi cations may only be made as indicated in the installation in-structions.Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.

Group 04:

RAL 1013E

RAL 3000E

RAL 5010E

RAL 6005E

RAL 7016E

RAL 7024E

RAL 7035E

RAL 9002E

RAL 9006E*

RAL 9010E

NCS 4020E

NCS 5020E

*pre-approval of the sample is required.

Group 05:

Colors by request only



ProtezioneLe porte sono previste per un normale impiego interno, per questo motivo devono essere protette dagli agenti at-mosferici e dai raggi solari diretti.Nei casi di applicazione all’esterno, si dovranno utilizzare vernici particolari adatte a questo tipo di impiego (vedi fascia 04, 05).

2. Avoid darker colors for gates which will be exposed to direct sun-light. Sheet metal can heat up and cause warping of the door leaf which could compromise the functionality of the door itself. Gates with a height of FM H > 4500 mm are only available with anti-rust fi nish in the light tone turquoise pastel color.


NINZ vertically sliding gatesFire DOOrS

FEATURES 178

REI 120 VERTICALLY SLINDING GATES 179

ELECTROMAGNETS, VISCOTROLLER 180

PAINTING 181

“fi re protection comes from above”

178

Ver

tic

all

y

slid

ing g

ates

FeaturesVertically sliding gates

Vertically sliding gates lift closure is available in classes:

REI 60 REI 90REI 30

WHat DeFiNeS tHeM?

REI120 fire rated gates are available with a vertically slid-ing system.The field of use includes large or small openings and/or special usage conditions in customer-specified size dimen-sions. Gates are supplied with flush insulated sheet metal panes, sliding guides, protective carters, counterweights, thermal fuses or electromagnets and finished with a base coat or RAL colors, plus other accessories as required for correct product functioning.


ATTENTIONVertically sliding gates are supplied as a single pre-assembled unit, which must be taken into consideration for purposes of handling.Fire compartmentalization elements should always be used properly. They are only designed for installation in spaces and constructions that are vertically aligned and flush.Compartmentalization for interiors is for areas that are not subject to strong air currents. Installation to be executed by specialized techni-cians only. For special applications consult with our technical office.The holding system for the gate is chosen by the customer to conform with their own worksite needs and the anti-fire design (thermal fuse or electromagnet).

NOTEFire rated gates require careful design which reflects their dimensions and special functions. Every installation site should be measured and checked for vertical alignment of the walls and gradients of the floor-ing. Particular care must be taken to check for protrusions or blockages that might hinder the operation or free movement of the gates. Given the considerable weight of gates, the bearing capacity of the walls involved should be checked for the mounting of guide tracks and over-lapping labyrinths.

179

Ver

tic

all

y

slid

ing g

atesrei 120 VerSiON

The vertically sliding gate series has the following features:

Door leafSingle unit made of continuous modules of hollow-core sheet metal panels insulated with appropriate materials. Leaf thickness 80 mm.

Guide trackSliding on lateral guide tracks and flame-resistant anti-friction anti-skid plates.

Overlapping labyrinthsMade of press-folded sheet metal.

CounterweightsCounterweights with adjustable balancing


SealingThermo-expanding on all overlapping labyrinths.



Wall opening dimensionsMin. 300 X 500 max. 3000 X 3000Larger sizes on request.

Normal operation modeThe gate remains in the open position, held by a thermal fuse located at the top on the labyrinth distancer. The gate can be closed manually. In case of fire the gate closes as soon as the thermal fuse fails.

PackagingOn disposable metal container.

WeightREI 120 vertical lift - approx. 50 kg/m² wall opening, ex-cluding guides and counterweights.

NOTEAdditional accessories are usually dependent on the size dimensions of the gate

FeaturesVertically sliding gates

Wal

l ope

ning

=

H m

in. 5

00H

+ 2

25

Door

fram

e ex

terio

r min

. 122

5

Wal

l ope

ning

'Windowsill' made of masonry provided by customer

30

200*

30

80

200*


150

Wall opening = L


180

Ver

tic

all

y

slid

ing g

ates

Optional accessoriesVertically sliding gates

Feed-in brakeV.T. Viscotroller®

Tuning

counterweight container

electromagnet strike plate

Electromagnet KIT 60 kg or 140 kg

Vt - ViScOtrOler®acciDeNt PreVeNtiON DeVice

Gates should always be equipped with an automatic device that controls the feed speed of the door during automatic closing.After the critical moment when automated re-closure has been initiated, door speed increases progressively in pro-portion to opening time and door weight. During emer-gency situations, the energy that develops could cause seri-ous injury/damage to people or objects within its range of motion. The hydraulic V.T. VISCOTROLLER® rotor makes it possible to set a constant closing speed in the range of 0.05 to 0,25 m/sec.

ATTENTIONFor purposes of accident prevention, gates should always be equipped with a feed-in brake to regulate closing speed. Customers who choose not to include the feed-in brake assume full responsibility for possible consequences.

electrOMaGNetS

Gates should always be equipped with an automatic device that controls the feed speed of the door during automatic closing.After the critical moment when automated re-closure has been initiated, door speed increases progressively in pro-portion to opening time and door weight. During emer-gency situations, the energy that develops could cause seri-ous injury/damage to people or objects within its range of motion. The hydraulic V.T. VISCOTROLLER® rotor makes it possible to set a constant closing speed in the range of 0.05 to 0,25 m/sec.

Technical data for the CC600N electromagnet per leaf up to 1.0 m² of wall opening




nominal power 3 W






Dati tecnici dell’elettromagnete CC1400N per anta oltre 1,0 m² di foro muro




nominal power 5 W






Marchiato CE in conformità alla NORMA EN 1155

181

Ver

tic

all

y

slid

ing g

ates

Optional accessoriesVertically sliding gates

PaiNtiNG


Group 01:

Gate color: light turquoise pastel (similar to NCS4020B50G)


RAL 1001

RAL 1013

RAL 1015

RAL 3000

RAL 3003

RAL 3020

RAL 5010

RAL 5012

RAL 5015

RAL 5024

RAL 6000

RAL 6005

RAL 7001

RAL 7004

RAL 7011

RAL 7016

RAL 7024

RAL 7030

RAL 7032

RAL 7035

RAL 7037

RAL 7038

RAL 7040

RAL 7042

RAL 7047

RAL 8011

RAL 8017

RAL 8019

RAL 9001

RAL 9002

RAL 9005

RAL 9010

RAL 9011

RAL 9016

RAL 9018


Re-paintingFor re-painting, use the following procedure: - sand and carefully wipe away any dust from the sur-

faces - apply a base layer of opaque 2-component epoxide





RAL 1004

RAL 1005

RAL 1006

RAL 1007

RAL 9006*



RAL 1003

RAL 1012

RAL 1016

RAL 1021

RAL 1023

RAL 5002

NOTE For printing-related reasons, the colors depicted should only be consid-ered as indicative. Consult the RAL or NCS samples.


ATTENTION External installation of gates require various measures for preventing product degradation, such as: 1. The gates should always be protected from bad weather. Permanent damage may result if water seeps inside the door leaf. Provide cano-pies or roofi ng to protect newly installed and existing products.2. Avoid darker colors for gates which will be exposed to direct sun-light. Sheet metal can heat up and cause warping of the door leaf which could compromise the functionality of the door itself.

GENERAL NOTESAll rights reserved.No reproduction (partial or total) without prior authorization by Ninz.Ninz reserves the right to modify the product.Installation should be executed by qualifi ed technicians.Modifi cations may only be made as indicated in the installation in-structions.Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.

“simplicity leads to savings”

NINZ windowsFiRE RATEd windows

REI 30 OR REI 60 WITH BLOCK FRAME 202

REI 60 AND REI 120 WITH FRAME EMBEDDED INTO THE WALL 203


202

win

do

ws

stee

l

Features Steel windows

REi 30 oR REi 60 wiTH BLoCK FRAME

-- Frame with a weight-bearing cold-formed hollow steel profile frame of 15/10 mm thickness, internally insulated with asbestos-free inorganic silicate mate-rial. Cross beams and/or uprights are positioned ac-cording to manufacturing criteria.

-- Fire resistant glazing is supplied un-mounted, and consists of extra-clear float panels with thermo-ex-pansive fire-proof material interposed.

-- Special finishing with thermoset powders, color cho-sen from our wide variety (see “painting” page).

-- Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow galvanized steel profiles with anchors for mortar fixing.

-- NON-CERTIFIED EXECUTION. Goods come with the glazing producer’s certification only, with no declara-tion of conformity or identification plate.

Data table REI 30 REI 60

casing thickness 50 mm 50 mm

glass door weight 40 kg/m² 55 kg/m²

approx. glass thickness 15 mm 23 mm

maximum dimensions L x H 1600 x 2300 1600 x 2800

maximum dimensions recommended for each glazed pane approx. 2 m² approx. 2 m²

74

25

50

Subframe opening L

NOTEFor purposes of handling, transport and installation plus the risk of breaking the glass, the manufacturer reserves the right, on a case by case basis, to decide whether to use 2 or more glazed panes while making windows.The transverse and/or upright inside each window are invoiced as separate items. Price supplements are required for glazed panes with surface areas greater than 2.0 m².Any telescopic joints which might be required to reduce the size re-quirements for transport and on-site maneuvering shall be invoiced as separate items.

ATTENTION These types of fire closures are required for internal compartmentaliza-tion and should be installed in areas that are protected from direct sunlight, other sources of heat and atmospherics agents. The use of suitable colors and glasses is required for windows located in areas which are partially exposed to direct sunlight.

74

Subf

ram

e op

enin

g H

25

Application (1)Mounting on external rebate

Application (2)Mounting onto block frame

Application (3)Mounting on internal rebate

203

win

do

ws

stee

l

REi 60 wiTH FRAME EMBEddEd inTo THE wALL

-- Frame made of 50 x 30 mm hollow steel profile with glass stops and 10 x 3 mm aerstop sealing.

-- Fire rated glass is supplied un-mounted, and consists of float panels with the interposition of thermo-ex-pansive fire proof material.

-- Prepared for attachment with plugs and inside the wall beyond the reveal on block frames.

-- Frame finished with green anti-rust (primer).-- NON-CERTIFIED EXECUTION. Goods come with the

glass producer’s certification only, with no declara-tion of conformity or identification plate.

Data table REI 60

casing thickness 50 mm

glass door weight 55 kg/m²

approx. glass thickness 21 mm

maximum dimensions L x H 1200 x 2100

NOTEExecution is only possible with a single glazed pane without any trans-verse and/or upright dividers.This glass type is for internal use only.

REi 120 wiTH FRAME EMBEddEd inTo THE wALL

-- Frame made of 80 x 30 mm hollow steel profiles with glass stops and 10 x 3 mm aerstop sealing.

-- Fire rated glass is supplied un-mounted, and consists of float panels with the interposition of thermo-ex-pansive fire proof material.

-- Prepared for attachment with plugs and inside the wall (out of sight).

-- Frame finished with green anti-rust (primer).-- NON-CERTIFIED EXECUTION. Goods come with the

glazing producer’s certification only, with no declara-tion of conformity or identification plate.

Data table REI 120





NOTEExecution is only possible with a single glazed pane without any trans-verse and/or upright dividers.

GENERAL NOTESThe use of suitable colors and glasses is required for doors located in areas that are partially exposed to direct sunlight or other heat sources. The casing must not be exposed to atmospheric agents in any case. For special instructions and recommendations regarding fire rated glass, see the “Notices” reported on the last page of the glass door acces-sories section of the present brochure.

All rights reserved. No reproduction (partial or total) without prior au-thorization by Ninz.Ninz reserves the right to modify the product. Installation should be executed by qualified technicians. Modifications may only be made as indicated in the installation instructions.Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.

55

Wal

l ope

ning

H

Wall opening L

55

55

Wal

l ope

ning

H

55

Wall opening L

Features Steel windows

“elegant luminositythat knows no boundaries”

NINZ aluminum windowsFiRE RATEd windows

REI 60 BLOCK FRAME 206

REI 90 OR REI 120 BLOCK FRAME 207


206

win

do

ws

alu

min

ium

REi 60 wiTH BLoCK FRAME

Aluminum windows, REI 60 (MI Circ. 91) mounted on sub-frame composed of:

-- REI 60 window with fire resistant casing, manufac-tured with special steel/aluminum profiles. Cross-beams and/or uprights are positioned in accordance with manufacturing criteria.

-- Fire resistant glass is supplied un-mounted and consists of extra-clear float panels with thermo-expansive fire proof material interposed for a total thickness of approx. 23mm.

-- Special finishing with thermoset powders, colors to select from our wide variety (see “painting” page).

-- Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow gal-vanized steel profiles with anchors for mortar fixing.

Data table REI 60





maximum dimensions recommended for each glazed pane approx. 2 m²

65

70

25 Subframe opening L

NOTEFor purposes of handling, transport and installation plus the risk of breaking the glass, the manufacturer reserves the right, on a case by case basis, to decide whether to use 2 or more glazed panes while making windows.

The transverse and/or upright dividers inside each window are invoiced as separate items. Price supplements are required for panels with sur-face areas greater than 2 m².

Any telescopic joints which might required to reduce the size require-ments for transport and on-site maneuvering shall be invoiced as sepa-rate items.

Subf

ram

e op

enin

g H

25

ATTENTIONThese types of fire closures are required for internal compart-mentalization and should be installed in areas that are pro-tected from direct sunlight, other sources of heat and atmospheric agents. The use of suitable colors and glasses is required for doors located areas that are partially exposed to direct sunlight.




FeaturesAluminum windows

207

win

do

ws

alu

min

ium

REi 90 oR REi 120 wiTH BLoCK FRAME

Glazed pane fixed in aluminum REI 90 or REI 120 (MI Circ. 91) mounted on subframe composed of:

-- REI 90 or REI 120 fire rated glass casing made of special hollow steel/aluminum profiles. Cross beams and/or up-rights, when necessary, are positioned according to man-ufacturing criteria. Total thickness of the casing 95 mm.

-- Fire resistant glass is supplied un-mounted and consists of extra-clear float panels with thermo-expansive fire proof material interposed for a total thickness of approx. 48 mm for REI 90 and approx. 52 mm for REI 120.

-- Special finishing with thermoset powders, colors to se-lect from our wide variety (see “painting” page).

-- Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow gal-vanized steel profiles with anchors for mortar fixing.



glass door weight 125 kg/m² 135 kg/m²


maximum dimensions L x H 1400 x 2000 1400 x 2000

maximum dimensions recommended for each glazed pane approx. 1,2 m² approx. 1,2 m²

65

95

Subframe opening L25

NOTEFor purposes of handling, transport and installation plus the risk of breaking the glass, the manufacturer reserves the right, on a case by case basis, to decide whether to use 2 or more glazed panes while making windows.

The transverse and/or upright dividers inside each window are invoiced as separate items. Price supplements are required for panels with sur-face areas greater than 1.2 m².

Any telescopic joints which might required to reduce the size require-ments for transport and on-site maneuvering shall be invoiced as sepa-rate items.


Subf

ram

e op

enin

g H

25

ATTENTIONThese types of fire closures are re-quired for internal compartmen-talization and should be installed in areas that are protected from direct sunlight, other sources of heat and atmospheric agents. The use of suitable colors and glasses is required for doors located in areas that are partially exposed to direct sunlight.





FeaturesAluminum windows

“the strength of steel and the transparency of glass”

NINZ glazed steel doorsFIRe Rated

ONE-LEAVED REI 30 AND REI 60 210

TWO-LEAVED REI 30 AND REI 60 211

REI 30 AND REI 60 WITH FIXED ELEMENTS 212

REI 30 AND REI 60 INSTALLATIONS 213


210

Gla

zed

ste

el

do

ors

ONe-leaVed ReI 30 aNd ReI 60

One leaf REI 30 and REI 60 glazed steel fire door in con-formity with UNI 9723, consisting of:

-- REI 30 or REI 60 fire rated glass casing, consisting of a 15/10 mm thick weight-bearing cold-formed hollow steel profile frame that is internally insulated with asbestos-free inorganic silicate material and provided with grooves for the rebate sealing and thermo-ex-pansive materials.

-- Heavy steel three-wing hinges screwed onto the pro-file rotate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless steel pivots.

-- Self-locking lock, to be opened by simple rotation of the handle.

-- ‘Yale’ cylinder in nickel-plated brass.-- Stainless steel handle mounted at 1040 mm above

the finished floor level or at 900 mm when combined with Touchbar panic bars.

-- Automatic closing mechanism via overhead door-closer with scissor arm.

-- Rebate sealing and thermo-expansive materials.-- Fire rated glass consisting of extra-clear float pan-

els with thermo-expansive fire proof material inter-posed.

-- Special finishing with thermoset powder paints.-- Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow

galvanized steel profiles with anchors for mortar fix-ing (38 x 17 x 2 mm).

Dimensionsminimum width L = 630

minimum width with panic bar L = 650

maximum width with or without panic bar L = 1400

minimum height allowed H = 1812

minimum height for escape routes H = 2074

maximum height allowed H = 2400

Net passage with 90° openingwith EXUS panic bar L – 313 mm

with TOUCHBAR panic bar L – 262 mm

without panic bar L – 188 mm



door weight 45 kg/m² 60 kg/m²


9070

785

25

Subf

ram

e op

enin

g =

orde

red

wal

l ope

ning

= H

FFL

Ope

ning

= H

- 74

25

Subframe opening = ordered wall opening = L

Opening = L - 148

Features Glazed steel doors

211

Gla

zed

ste

el

do

ors

tWO-leaVed ReI 30 aNd ReI 60

REI 30 and REI 60 glazed fire door in conformity with UNI 9723 in steel with two leaves, consisting of:

-- REI 30 or REI 60 fire rated glass casing, consisting of a 15/10 mm thick weight-bearing cold-formed hollow steel profile that is internally insulated with asbestos-free inorganic silicate material and provided with grooves for the rebate sealing and thermo-expansive materials.

-- Heavy steel three-wing hinges screwed on to the pro-file rotate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless steel pivots.


-- ‘Yale’ cylinder in nickel-plated brass.-- Stainless steel handle mounted on main leaf at 1040

mm above the finished floor level or at 900 mm when combined with Touchbar panic bars.


-- Self-locking latch on secondary leaf and visible clos-ing regulator.

-- Rebate sealing and thermo-expansive materials.-- Fire resistant glass consisting of extra-clear float pan-




Dimensionsmin. width L = 950 (L1 = 569 L2 = 381)

min. width with panic bar L = 1200 (L1 ≥ 600 L2 ≥ 400)

max. width with or without panic bar L = 2600 (L1 = 1300 L2 = 1300)

min. height allowed H = 1812

min. height for escape routes H = 2074

max. height allowed H = 2400

Net passage with 90° openingwith 2 EXUS panic bars L – 478 mm

with 2 TOUCHBAR panic bars L – 376 mm

without panic bars L – 228 mm

L2 L1

25


Main leaf doorframe opening = L1 - 89

Opening = L - 148

9070

785

25

Subf

ram

e op

enin

g =

orde

red

wal

l ope

ning

= H

FFL

Ope

ning

= H

- 74

NOTEWith L1 main leaf less than 700 mm or with L2 secondary leaf less than 580 mm, the door closers are on the non-hinge side and prevent opening beyond 110°.

For size’s reasons, the SR390 clos-ing regulator (included) can’t be used in combination with the CP2 door closers. Use the RC2 system.



door weight 45 kg/m² 60 kg/m²



212

Gla

zed

ste

el

do

ors

ReI 30 aNd ReI 60 WItH FIXed eleMeNts

REI 30 and REI 60 fire rated complex glazed pane in con-formity with UNI 9723 in steel, consisting of:

-- REI 30 or REI 60 fire rated glass casing made of a 15/10 mm thick weight-bearing cold-formed hollow steel profiles that are internally insulated with asbestos-free inorganic silicate material and provided with channels for the rebate sealing and thermo-expan-sive materials.

-- Heavy steel three-wing hinges screwed onto the pro-file rotate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless steel pivots.





-- Self-locking latch on secondary leaf or visible closing regulator.

-- Rebate sealing and thermo-expansive materials.-- Fire rated glass composed of extra-clear float panels

with thermo-expansive fire proof material interposed.-- Special finishing with thermoset powder paints.-- Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow


Dimensionsmin. width L = 950 ( a = 569 p = 381)min. width with panic bar L = 1200 ( a ≥ 600 p ≥ 400)max. width with or without panic bar L = 2600 ( a = 1300 p = 1300)min. leaf height allowed H1 = 1812min. leaf height for escape routes H1 = 2070max. leaf height allowed H1 = 2400L2, L3 and H2 measurements min. 300recommended maximum (others on request) L = 6000 H = 4000 area=18 m²

Net passage with 90° openingwith 2 EXUS panic bars L1 – 470 mmwith 2 TOUCHBAR panic bars L1 – 368 mm without panic bars L1 – 220 mm


casing thickness 50 mm 50 mmdoor weight 45 kg/m² 60 kg/m²approx. glass thickness 15 mm 23 mm

Opening = L1 - 140 2525

L3


L1 L2

passive leaf = p active leaf = a

9070

785

25

Subf

ram

e op

enin

g =

orde

red

wal

l ope

ning

= H

H2H1

FFL

Ope

ning

= H

1- 7

0


For purposes of handling, trans-port and installation plus the risk of breaking the glass, the manu-facturer reserves the right, on a case by case basis, to execute fixed glazed doors with the necessary number of panels.

The transverse and/or upright di-viders inside each glass door are invoiced as separate items.The glass for the fixed parts re-quires assembly.

Wall opening dimensions may vary as a function of lateral and/or up-per fixtures and their width and/or height.

For size’s reasons, the SR390 closing regulator (included) can’t be used in combination with the CP2 door closers. Use the RC2 system.

Any telescopic joints that might be required to reduce size requirements for transport and on-site maneuvering shall be invoiced as separate items (maximum possible size without junctions is 2500 x 3000 mm).


213

Gla

zed

ste

el

do

ors

InstallationsGlazed steel doors

steel ReI 30 aNd ReI 60 INstallatIONs

REI 30 and REI 60 fire rated glass closures are custom built which means that the required dimensions must be specified

Installation (1): mounting on external rebate

50

130

4Wall opening = Subframe opening

REI 30 or REI 60 glass

Subframe in hollow galvanized profiles

20 50

horizontal cross section

Application (2): mounting onto block frame

Limited opening beyond 90°


Application (3): mounting on internal rebate




in the order. It is also important that the sections they are applied to consist of weight bearing walls.

50

130

4W

all o

peni

ng =

Sub

fram

e op

enin

g

REI 30 or REI 60 glass

Subframe in hollowgalvanized profiles

38 x 17 x 2

2050

vertical cross section




“the top of the line in transparent safety”

NINZ glazed aluminum doorsFIRe RaTed

ONE- AND TWO-LEAVED REI 60 216 - 217

REI 60 WITH FIXED ELEMENTS 218

REI 60 INSTALLATIONS 219

ONE- AND TWO-LEAVED REI 90 AND REI 120 220 - 221 REI 90 AND REI 120 WITH FIXED ELEMENTS 222

REI 90 AND REI 120 INSTALLATIONS 223


216

Gla

zed

alu

do

ors

FeaturesGlazed aluminum doors

ONe-leaVed ReI 60

One leaf REI 60 fire-rated aluminum glazed doors in con-formity with UNI 9723 and consisting of:

-- REI 60 fire-rated glazed casing made of special steel/aluminum profiles.

-- Heavy steel two-wing hinges welded onto the profile rotate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless steel pivots.


-- ‘Yale’ cylinder in nickel-plated brass.-- Stainless steel handle mounted at 1040 mm above

the finished floor level or at 965 mm when combined with Touchbar panic bars.





Dimensionsminimum width L = 630

minimum width with panic bar L = 650

maximum width with or without panic bar L = 1400

minimum height allowed H = 1809

minimum height for escape routes H = 2065

maximum height allowed H = 2400

Net passage with 90° openingwith EXUS panic bar L – 327 mm

with TOUCHBAR panic bar L – 276 mm

without panic bar L – 202 mm

Data table REI 60


door weight 80 kg/m²


710

Subf

ram

e op

enin

g =

orde

red

wal

l ope

ning

= H

25

Ope

ning

= H

- 65

170

FFL

25


70

25

Opening = L - 130

217

Gla

zed

alu

do

ors


ReI 60 WITH TWO leaVeS

Two leaves REI 60 fire rated aluminum glass door in con-formity with UNI 9723 consisting of:

-- REI 60 fire rated glass casing made of special steel/alu-minum profiles.

-- Heavy steel two-wing hinges welded on to the profile rotate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless steel pivots.




-- Automatic closing mechanism via overhead door-clos-er with scissor arm.

-- Self-locking latch on secondary leaf and visible closing regulator.




Dimensionsmin. width L = 950 ( L1 = 567 L2 = 383)

min. width with panic bar L = 1500 ( L1 ≥ 750 L2 ≥ 600)

max. width with or without panic bar L = 2600 ( L1=1300 L2 = 1300)

min. height allowed H = 1809

min. height for escape routes H = 2065

max. height allowed H = 2400

Net passage with 90° openingwith 2 EXUS panic bars L – 524 mm

with 2 TOUCHBAR panic bars L – 422 mm

without panic bars L – 274 mm

25

L2

Main leaf doorframe opening = L1 - 72,5

L1

Opening = L - 130


25

70

710

Subf

ram

e op

enin

g =

orde

red

wal

l ope

ning

= H

25

Ope

ning

= H

- 65

170

FFL



Data table REI 60


door weight 80 kg/m²


218

Gla

zed

alu

do

ors


ReI 60 WITH FIXed eleMeNTS

Vetrata complessa tagliafuoco REI 60 conforme UNI 9723 in alluminio composta da: -- REI 60 fire rated glass casing made of special steel/

aluminum profiles.-- Heavy steel two-wing hinges welded on to the profile

rotate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless steel pivots.



mm above the finished floor level or at 965 mm when combined with panic bars.



-- Rebate sealing and thermo-expansive materials.-- Fire rated glass composed of extra-clear float pan-




Dimensionsmin. width L = 950 ( a = 567 p = 383)min. width with panic bar L = 1500 ( a ≥ 750 p ≥ 600)max. width with or without panic bar L = 2600 ( a =1300 p =1300)min. leaf height allowed H1 = 1809min. leaf height for escape routes H1 = 2085max. leaf height allowed H1 = 2400L2, L3 and H2 measurements min. 300recommended maximum (others on request) L = 6000 H = 4000 area=18m²

Net passage with 90° openingwith 2 EXUS panic bars L1 – 564 mmwith 2 TOUCHBAR panic bars L1 – 462 mmwithout panic bars L1 – 314 mm

Data table REI 60

casing thickness 70 mmdoor weight 80 kg/m²approx. glass thickness 23 mm

25

L3


Opening = L1 - 170L1 L2

25

65152

70

passive leaf = p active leaf = a

710

Subf

ram

e op

enin

g =

orde

red

wal

l ope

ning

= H

H1

25

H2

Ope

ning

= H

1 - 8

5

FFL


For purposes of handling, transport and installation plus the risk of breaking the glass, the manufac-turer reserves the right, on a case by case basis, to execute fixed glazed doors with the necessary number of panels.

The transverse and/or upright di-viders inside each glass door are invoiced as separate items. The glass for the fixed parts requires assembly.

Wall opening dimensions may vary as a function of lateral and/or up-per fixtures and their width and/or height.


Any telescopic joints that might be required to reduce size requirements for transport and on-site maneuvering shall be invoiced as separate items (maximum possible size without junctions is 2500 x 3000 mm).

219

Gla

zed

alu

do

ors

REI 60 InstallationsGlazed aluminum doors

ReI 60 aluMINuM INSTallaTIONS

REI 60 fire rated glass closures made of aluminum are made to measure, which means that all dimensions need to be specified in the order. It is also important that the sections


70

128

Wall opening = Subframe opening

Subframe in hollow galvanized profiles (60 x 20 x 2)

REI 60 Glass


Installation (2): mounting onto block frame



Applicazione (3): montaggio in battuta interna



they are applied to be support walls so that the installa-tion can be completed with the necessary cover strips.

70

128

Wal

l ope

ning

= S

ubfra

me

open

ing





220

Gla

zed

alu

do

ors


ONe-leaVed ReI 90 aNd ReI 120

One leaf REI 90 and REI 120 fire rated glazed doors in con-formity with UNI 9723 consisting of:

-- REI 90 or REI 120 fire rated glass casing made of special steel/aluminum profiles.

-- Heavy steel three-wing hinges welded on to the profile ro-tate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless steel pivots.


-- ‘Yale’ cylinder in nickel-plated brass.-- Stainless steel handle mounted at 1040 mm above the

finished floor level or at 965 mm when combined with Touchbar panic bars.



with thermo-expansive fire proof material interposed.-- Special finishing with thermoset powder paints.-- Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow gal-

vanized steel profiles with anchors for mortar fixing (80 x 20 x 2 mm).

Dimensionsminimum width L = 630minimum width with panic bar L = 650maximum width with or without panic bar L = 1320minimum height allowed H = 1809minimum height for escape routes H = 2065maximum height allowed H = 2200

Net passage with 90° openingwith EXUS panic bar L – 352 mmwith TOUCHBAR panic bar L – 301 mm without panic bar L – 227 mm



ATTENTIONThe considerable weight of glazed doors may make them more difficult to use, especially for people with reduced motor capacities (disabled, seniors, in poor health, etc.).It is important to take this factor into consideration while planning the use of this product and/or to always hold the leaves open by means of electromagnets.

710

Subf

ram

e op

enin

g =

orde

red

wal

l ope

ning

= H

25

Ope

ning

= H

- 65

170

FFL

25

Opening = L - 130


25

95

221

Gla

zed

alu

do

ors


TWO-leaVed ReI 90 aNd ReI 120

Two leaf REI 90 and REI 120 fire rated glazed door in con-formity with UNI 9723consisting of:

-- REI 90 or REI 120 fire rated glass casing made of special steel/aluminum profiles.

-- Heavy steel three-wing hinges welded onto the pro-file rotate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless steel pivots.







with thermo-expansive fire proof material interposed.-- Special finishing with thermoset powder paints.-- Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow gal-

vanized steel profiles with anchors for mortar fixing (80 x 20 x 2 mm).

Dimensionsmin. width L = 950 ( L1 = 567 L2 = 383)min. width with panic L = 1600 ( L1 ≥ 800 L2 ≥ 700)max. width with or without panic bar L = 2400 ( L1=1200 L2=1200)min. height allowed H = 1809min. height for escape routes H = 2065max. height allowed H = 2200

Net passage with 90° openingwith 2 EXUS panic bars L – 574 mmwith 2 TOUCHBAR panic bars L – 472 mm without panic bars L – 324 mm



25

L2

Main leaf doorframe opening = L1 - 72,5

L1

Opening = L - 130


25

95

710

Subf

ram

e op

enin

g =

orde

red

wal

l ope

ning

= H

25

Ope

ning

= H

- 65

170

FFL

NOTEWith L1 main leaf less than 700 mm or with L2 secondary leaf less than 580 mm, the door closers are on the non-hinge side and prevent opening be-yond 110°.


ATTENTION The considerable weight of glazed doors may make them more difficult to use, especially for people with reduced motor capacities (disabled, seniors, in poor health, etc.).It is important to take this factor into consideration while planning the use of this product and/or to always hold the leaves open by means of electromagnets.

222

Gla

zed

alu

do

ors


ReI 90 aNd ReI 120 WITH FIXed eleMeNTS

REI 90 and REI 120 glazed door complex in conformity with UNI 9723 in aluminum consisting of:

-- REI 90 or REI 120 fire rated glass casing made of spe-cial steel/aluminum profiles.

-- Heavy steel three-wing hinges welded onto the pro-file rotate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless steel pivots.







with thermo-expansive fire proof material interposed.-- Special finishing with thermoset powder paints.-- Subframe to be ordered separately, made of galva-

nized steel tubing with anchors for mortar fixing (80 x 20 x 2 mm).

Dimensionsmin. width L1 = 950 ( a = 567 p = 383)min. width with panic bar L1 = 1600 ( a ≥ 800 p ≥ 700)max. width with or without panic bar L1 = 2400 ( a =1200 p =1200)min. leaf height allowed H1 = 1809min. leaf height for escape routes H1 = 2085max. leaf height allowed H1 = 2200L2, L3 and H2 measurements min. 300recommended maximum (others on request) L = 6000 H = 4000 area=18m²

Net passage with 90° openingwith 2 EXUS panic bars L1 – 614 mmwith 2 TOUCHBAR panic bars L1 – 512 mm without panic bars L1 – 364 mm



25

L3


Opening = L1- 170L1 L2

active leaf = apassive leaf = p

25

65152

95

710

Subf

ram

e op

enin

g =

orde

red

wal

l ope

ning

= H

H1

25

H2

Ope

ning

= H

1 - 8

5

FFL

NOTEWith L1 main leaf less than 700 mm or with L2 secondary leaf less than 580 mm, the door closers are on the non-hinge side and prevent opening be-yond 110°. For purposes of handling, transport and installation plus the risk of breaking the glass, the manufactur-er reserves the right, on a case by case basis, to execute fixed glazed doors with the necessary number of panels. The transverse and/or upright dividers inside each glass door are invoiced as separate items. Price supplements are required for panels with surface areas greater than 1.2 m². The glass for the fixed parts requires assembly.Any telescopic joints that might be re-quired to reduce size requirements for transport and on-site maneuvering shall be invoiced as separate items (maxi-mum possible size without junctions is 2500 x 3000 mm). For size’s reasons, the SR390 closing regulator (included) can’t be used in combination with the CP2 door closers. Use the RC2 system.


ATTENTION The considerable weight of glazed doors may make them more difficult to use, especially for people with reduced motor capacities (disabled, seniors, in poor health, etc.). It is important to take this factor into consideration, therefore, while planning the use of this product and/or to always hold the leaves open by means of electromagnets.

223

Gla

zed

alu

do

ors

REI 90 and REI 120 installationsGlazed aluminum doors

ReI 90 aNd ReI 120 aluMINuM INSTallaTIONS

REI 90 ad REI 120 fire rated glass closures made of alumi-num are built to measure, which means that all dimen-sions need to be specified in the order. It is also important.


95

128

Wall opening = Subframe opening

Subframe in hollow galvanized profiles (80 x 20 x 2)REI 90 orREI 120 glass


Installation (2): mounting onto block frame



Installation (3): mounting on internal rebate



GENERAL NOTESThe use of suitable colors and glasses is required for doors located in areas that are partially exposed to direct sunlight or other heat sources. The casing must not be exposed to atmospheric agents in any case. For special instructions and recommendations regarding fire rated glass, see the “Notices” reported on the last page of the glass door accessories section of the present brochure.

that they be applied to support walls so that the installa-tion can be completed with the necessary cover strips

95

128


Wal

l ope

ning

= S

ubfra

me

open

ing





“quality accessories distinguish the door“

Accessories for NINZ glazed doorsFire rATeD

PAINTING 226

SPECIAL TREATMENTS - PYLON 227

SUBFRAMES 228 - 229

DOOR CLOSERS, CLOSING REGULATORS 230 - 231

ELECTRIC HANDLE 232

CONTROLLED ACCESS SYSTEMS 233

DOOR-HOLDING SYSTEMS 234 - 235

PANIC BARS 236 - 242

NOTICES - GLAZED DOORS 243


226

Ac

ces

sor

ies

gla

zed

do

ors

PAiNTiNG For sTeeL GLAZeD Doors WiTH BLocK FrAMe

The glazed steel doors come with special fi nishing in ther-moset powder paints. The colors reported in the table (side) are always available. Other tints are available on request only.

ATTENTIONThe paint deteriorates upon exposure to direct sunlight or atmospheric agents

PAiNTiNG For sTeeL/ALUMiNUM GLAZeD Doors

The glazed aluminum doors come with special fi nishing in thermoset powder paints. The colors reported in the table (side) are always available. Other tints are available on re-quest only.

ATTENTIONThe paint deteriorates upon exposure to direct sunlight or atmospheric agents

Due to artifacts of the printing process, the colors depicted here may not correspond exactly to the colors of actual doors. Please refer to RAL or NCS samples.

PaintingFor fi re rated glazed doors

Colors always available:

RAL 1013

RAL 3000

RAL 5010

RAL 6005

RAL 7035

RAL 8017

RAL 9005

RAL 9006

RAL 9010

NCS 4020-B50G

NCS 5020-B50G

Colors available:

RAL 1013

RAL 3000

RAL 5010

RAL 6005

RAL 7035

RAL 8017

RAL 9010

RAL 9005

RAL 9006

NCS 4020-B50G

NCS 5020-B50G

Anodized colors:

silver light bronze

dark brown black

227

Ac

ces

sor

ies

gla

zed

do

orsTreATMeNTs For eXTerior Use

When glazed doors are used in locations exposed to di-rect UV rays from sunlight or internal lighting, special glass protection and coloration/paint is available to adapt to this environment. The side of the glass that requires special treatment will need to be specifi ed (the glass-stop side or the opposite side). If left unspecifi ed, the special treatment will be applied to the side opposite to the glass stops. A sticker will be applied to indicate the protected side for purposes of assembly and installation.

Glazed doors for external environments should always be protected from water.Painting and glass treatment for external environments is only available for REI 30, REI 60 and REI 120 closures with block frames!

PYLoN

Pylon and/or transverse element for the reinforcement or partitioning of complex elements. Made of an internal steel profi le measuring 80 x 80 x 3 mm and surfaced with Promatec panels, with visible edges being fi nished with painted metal plates with the same fi nishing as the casing itself. Manufactured to measure and ready for attachment.

1204

120

Pylon for REI 30 and REI 60 glazed doors, 120 x 120 section

FiLM

To reduce or prevent external visibility while maintaining optimal internal visibility, REI 30, REI 60 and REI 120 glass-es with block frames may be equipped with opacifying or covering fi lms (black or white) that have been designed for the purpose. The side of the glass that requires special treatment will need to be specifi ed (the glass-stop side or the opposite side). If left unspecifi ed, the fi lm will be ap-plied to the glass-stop side.

Film application is only available for REI 30, REI 60 and REI 120 closures with block frames!

149

1205

Pylon for REI 90 and REI 120 glazed doors, 120 x 149 section

Special treatments For fi re rated glazed doors

228

Ac

ces

sor

ies

gla

zed

do

ors THree-siDeD sUBFrAMe

REI 30 or REI 60 in steelSubframe ready for assembly for REI 30 and REI 60 one-leaved, two-leaved and complex glazed doors made of steel. Made of hollow galvanized steel profi les with a 38 x 17 x 2 mm shaped section. Includes spacers that can be disassembled and anchors for mortar fi xing.

38

Wall opening ordered FM Lsubframe opening

Required opening = FM L + 40

REI 60 in steel/aluminumSubframe for REI 60 steel/aluminum one-leaved, two-leaved and complex glazed doors. Made of hollow gal-vanized steel profi les with a 60 x 20 x 2 mm rectangular section. Includes spacers that can be disassembled and an-chors for mortar fi xing.

60



REI 90 or REI 120 in steel/aluminumSubframe for REI 90 and REI 120 one-leaved, two-leaved and complex glazed doors made of steel. Made of hollow galvanized steel profi les with a 80 x 20 x 2 mm rectangu-lar section. Includes spacers that can be disassembled and anchors for mortar fi xing.

80



NOTEThe subframe optional accessory is to be ordered separately.

ATTENTION Order measurements for subframes are the same as their internal measurements, which correspond to the order measurements (FM) for the glazed door.

Wal

l ope

ning

ord

ered

FM

Hsu

bfra

me

open

ing

Requ

ired

open

ing

= F

M H

+ 2

0

Wal

l ope

ning

ord

ered

FM

Hsu

bfra

me

open

ing

Requ

ired

open

ing

= F

M H

+ 2

5

Wal

l ope

ning

ord

ered

FM

Hsu

bfra

me

open

ing

Requ

ired

open

ing

= F

M H

+ 2

5

SubframesFor fi re rated glazed doors

229

Ac

ces

sor

ies

gla

zed

do

orsFoUr-siDeD sUBFrAMe

REI 30 or REI 60 in steelSubframe ready for assembly for REI 30 and REI 60 steel windows with block frame. Made of hollow galvanized steel profi les with a 38 x 17 x 2 mm shaped section. In-cludes spacers that can be disassembled and anchors for mortar fi xing.

38



REI 60 in steel/aluminumSubframe for REI 60 steel/aluminum windows with block frame. Made of hollow galvanized steel profi les with a 60 x 20 x 2 mm rectangular section. Includes spacers that can be disassembled and anchors for mortar fi xing.

60



REI 90 or REI 120 in steel/aluminumSubframe for REI 90 and REI 120 steel/aluminum windows with block frame. Made of hollow galvanized steel profi les with a 80 x 20 x 2 mm rectangular section. Includes spacers that can be disassembled and anchors for mortar fi xing.

80



NOTEThe subframe option needs to be expressly ordered.

ATTENTION The order measurements for the subframe are equal to its internal measurements, which correspond to the order measurements (FM) for the glazed door.

Wal

l ope

ning

ord

ered

= F

M H

subf

ram

e op

enin

g

Requ

ired

open

ing

= F

M H

+ 4

0

Wal

l ope

ning

ord

ered

FM

Hsu

bfra

me

open

ing

Requ

ired

open

ing

= F

M H

+ 5

0

Wal

l ope

ning

ord

ered

FM

Hsu

bfra

me

open

ing

Requ

ired

open

ing

= F

M H

+ 5

0

SubframesFor fi re rated glazed doors

230

Ac

ces

sor

ies

gla

zed

do

ors

Door closersFor fire rated glazed doors

Door cLoser

Door closers serve to ensure the automatic closing of glazed doors and allow for the regulation of closure force, speed and final impact. Door closer products are addressed by EU directive 89/106/CEE, which means they are subject to marking.

Color options:

RAL dark bronze

RAL 9016

RAL 9005

CP1 and CP1 (V) with scissor arm marked in conformity with EN 1154.

Each leaf is equipped with an overhead CP1 door closer with a silver-colored scissor arm. The CP1 is suited for use on fire rated glazed doors and has been classified for 180° closure with a force level of 3 or 4 for the CP1 and 2 or 6 for the CP1 (V).. Installation holes are pre-drilled into the leaf and frame.

NOTE Arm protrusion = 290 mm for the CP1 or 280 mm for the CP1 (V)

CP2 with slide channel marked in conformity with EN 1154.

On request, glazed doors are available with overhead CP2 door closers with slide channels. Relative to the CP1, the ad-vantage of this system is the absence of a protruding arm.The CP2 is suited for use on fire rated glazed doors and has been classified for 180° closure with force level 4.Glazed doors ordered with CP2 are provided with pre-drilled installation holes on the door leaf and the frame.

CP2-EMF with slide channel and electro-mechan-ical check

marked in conformity with EN 1154 and EN 1155.The CP2–EMF differs from the CP2 in that it has an electro-mechanical hold-open device that allows the door leaf to be locked at an angle ranging from 80° to 120°. During alarms or power outages, the hold-open device is unlocked and the door is closed by the door closer.The CP2-EMF can be used on fire rated glazed doors and has a maximum opening range of 120°, with a closing force set at 4.Glazed doors ordered with CP2-EMF are provided with pre-drilled installation holes on the door leaf and the frame.

maximum opening in the absence of obstaclesModel one-leaved door active leaf passive leaf CP1/CP1 (V) 180° 180° 180°CP2 180° 180° 180°CP2-EMF 120° 120° 120°

power supply absorptionModel EC certification standardCP1CP1 (V) - - 0432-BPR-0054

0432-BPR-0007 EN 1154

CP2 - - 0432-BPR-0051 EN 1154

CP2-EMF 24 Vcc 58,3 mA 0432-BPR-00510432-BPR-0025

EN 1154EN 1155

231

Ac

ces

sor

ies

gla

zed

do

ors

Closing regulatorsFor fire rated glazed doors

cLosiNG reGULATors

Closing regulators administer the closure of two-leaved doors so that the secondary leaf is overlaid on the active leaf upon final closure. This is why it is mandatory to apply closing regulators to all two-leaved fire doors.There are two systems for applying it to the door:- separated from the self-closing system of the door closer- incorporated into the closure system of the door closerClosing regulators are addressed by EU directive 89/106/CEE, which means they are subject to marking.

SR390 Closing regulatorThe SR390 closing regulator device is distinct from the door closer and is a standard element of all fire rated glazed doors with two leaves. marked in conformity with EN 1158.

480

128

79

35

RC2 system marked in conformity with EN 1154 and EN 1158.

On request, two-leaved glazed doors are available with an RC2 regulator in place of the SR390.The RC2 closing regulator system is incorporated into the door closer, and consists of 2 CP2 with force EN 4 with a slide channel and a regulator integrated into the upper sliding guide. The entire system is silver colored.

The RC2 system presents clear advantages:- no protrud-ing door closer arms- regulator concealed in the upper guide (even when the door is open)- controlled closure of both leavesThe RC2 regulator is suited for use on fire rated doors and has been classified for both door closers with force level EN 4. Minimum wall opening width of 1320 mm and minimum of 420 mm for the secondary leaf. Glazed doors ordered with RC2s come with pre-drilled holes for the ap-plication of 2 CP2 door closers on the leaves and sliding guide on the frame.

RC2 / RC2-EMF1

maximum opening in the absence of obstaclesModel active leaf passive leaf power supplySR390 180° 180° -RC2 180° 180° -RC2-EMF1 130° 120° 24 Vcc

absorptionModel EC certification standardSR390 - 0432-BPR-0026 EN 1154

RC2 - 0432-BPR-00510432-BPR-0026

EN 1154EN 1158

RC2-EMF1 58,3 mA0432-BPR-00510432-BPR-00250432-BPR-0026

EN 1154EN 1155EN 1158

The SR390 regulator is suited for fire doors and has been classified for force levels ranging from 3 to 7.

RC2–EMF1 System marked in conformity with EN 1154, EN 1158 and EN

1155.The RC2–EMF1 system differs from the RC2 in that it has an electro-mechanical hold-open device that allows the door leaf to be locked at an angle ranging from approx. 80° to 130°. The active leaf is held open by the closing regulator system. During alarms or power outages, the hold-open system is unlocked and the door is closed by the door closer. The entire system is provided in the standard silver color.

The RC2-EMF1 system presents multiple advantages:-- possibility of holding the leaves open in the desired po-sition-- no visible magnets-- no protruding door closer arms-- regulator concealed in the upper guide (even when the door is open)-- controlled closure of both leaves

The RC2-EMF1 system is suited for use on fire rated doors and is classified for both door closers with force level EN 4.Minimum wall opening of 1320 mm and minimum of 420 mm for the secondary leaf.Glazed doors ordered with RC2-EMF1 are provided with pre-drilled installation holes on the door leaf and the frame.

Color options for RC2 / RC2-EMF1:

RAL dark bronze

RAL 9016

RAL 9005

232

Ac

ces

sor

ies

gla

zed

do

ors

Electric handleFor fire rated glazed doors

eLM/cisA MULTi-VoLTAGe cisA eLecTric HANDLe

Controlled door opening system that employs an electron-ic device to activate the handle. Equipped with a separate timer (for insertion into the switch box) which can be set for different opening times: from a minimum of 0,1 sec-ond to a maximum of 10 days.Equipped with green LED that signal activation of the handle.

The ELM/cisa system includes: electric handles, 2 meters of power cable, cable sleeve for the connection between the leaf and the frame, 8/9 square spindle, fixing screws, adjustable timer packaged separately.

Technical data


current absorbed 330 mA

startup current 800 mA


max. relative ambient humidity 95%

NOTE The electric handle requires assembly.

PANic BArs For coMBiNATioN WiTH eLecTric HANDLe

FunctionControlled opening is only possible for the ‘pull’ direction side (side on which the electric handle is installed) when combined with panic bars. Locking the lock by key blocks the electric handle functioning, while opening is still pos-sible via the panic bar on the push side.For additional information see the dedicated pages.

UseOne- or two-leaved doors of emergency exits.

3338

75

92

190

141.5

277

The Touchbar panic exit device can be installed with all glazed door types

Exus panic bar can be installed with all glazed door types except for

REI 90 and REI 120

233

Ac

ces

sor

ies

gla

zed

do

ors

EM controlled openingFor fi re rated glazed doors

coNTroLLeD oPeNiNG sYsTeM

This system is for use in special situations when the glazed doors remain closed and should only be opened with elec-trical consent. The electrically powered electromagnet holds the door closed with a holding force of approxi-mately 300 kg, rendering the action of the handle ineffec-tive. Only electrical commands (badge reader, key button, etc.) or electrical consent from the fi re detector system can deactivate the electromagnet making a door opening possible.

OperationThe door is held closed by the electromagnet (01) and the bolt of the lock. Opening from the outside can happen via magnetic card (04) using the Badge reader (02) of the card control system or any other system of choice and by retracting the bolt using the handle or key.From the inside, the deactivation of the electromagnet is caused by the unlock button (03) (also remotely) or with the same system used for the pull side, while the locking bolt must still be retracted using the handle or key. The activated electromagnet signals its state with a red LED, whereas the green LED signals the temporary deactiva-tion. Further a relay n.o./n.c. signaling the electromag-netic state is supplied.

Technical data

model 13700 TD withstand force up to 300 Kg.

power supply 12/24 Vcc time delay 0 ÷ 90 sec.

current absorbed at 12 V 500 mA electrom. compatib standard EMC - UNI CEI 70011

current absorbed at 24 V 250 mA certifi cate Nr. 0123/02

coMPoNeNTs For iNDiViDUAL orDeriNG

(01) Flat electromagnet300 kg withholding force, 12/24 V DC for glazed doorsincludes: anchor and attachment plate

(02) Unlock button(art. GW 20 523)

(03) Card-based control system(art. 55611 + 55613 + 55615)with timerincludes: Badge reader, control unit, fl at cable, external 230 V AC/15 V AC transformer, three blank badges and one simple coded magnetic badge

02

01

03

04

NOTE Unblocking of the door is only possible if the door is not locked by key.

(01) Electromagnet (02) Unlock button

(03) Card-based control system

234

Ac

ces

sor

ies

gla

zed

do

ors

Door-holding systemsFor fi re rated glazed doors

c2 MoNo-ZoNe MicroProcessor

Certifi ed in accordance with EN 1154-2 and EN 1154-4 standards.The processor was designed and built in conformity with UNI EN 1154 standards, which regulate processors for fi re alarms and related accessories which each must conform with EN1154 standards.

Technical data

model 52002primary power supply 230 dc, 100 mA, 50-60Hzauxiliary power supply 2 batterie 12 Vcc/1,1 ÷ 1,3 Ahminimum output current 264 mAmaximum output current 424 mAbuffer battery charger output 24 Vcc (27,6 Vcc)protection rating IP30operational temperature -5°C ÷ +40°Coperational zones single zone (mono-zone)

acoustic alarm internal buzzer

"low battery" signal intermittent internal buzzer

EC certifi cation 0051-CPD-0264

conformity with standards EN 1154-2 +A1:2006EN 1154-4:1997 + A1:2002 + A1:2006

ATTENTIONAccording to standard EN 1154-4, it is obligatory for the mono-zone processor to be equipped with:- Nr. 1 heat/smoke detector RFC certif. EN 1154-7- Nr. 1 pair of buffer batteries - Nr. 1 external electronic siren certif. EN 1154-3- Nr. 1 alarm activation button certif. EN 1154/11

rFc HeAT AND sMoKe DeTecTor

Certifi ed in accordance with UNI EN 1154-5 and EN 1154-7 standards.RFC heat and smoke detector characterized by white ABS casing. Optical/thermic operation with intervention tem-perature to be set between 54 and 65°C. To ensure proper functioning, the detectors must be subjected to regular 6-month maintenance checks. Please note that it is inad-visable to position the sensor where strong air currents are present.

Technical dataoperational voltage 10 ÷ 30 Vcc, tipico 24 Vccconsumption at rest, at 24 V DC 70 µAabsorption of alarm at 24 V DC 50 mA

BUFFer BATTeries

Pair of rechargeable buffer batteries, 12 V DC/1.2 Ah


150

48

240

This is a control unit which administers the door-holding electromagnets for fi re doors, where standards require consideration of every possible and imponder-able event that could happen during normal functioning. The following, there-fore, are subject to constant monitoring: all exits towards the smoke and heat detectors, the alarm and reset buttons, the external siren and the charge of the two batteries. The microprocessor itself, which functions as the brain of the system, is constantly monitored at regular intervals by a specifi c system routine that checks for proper functioning of the operational software. Any hitches, breakdowns or malfunctions are signaled by one of the ten LED diodes on the front panel, and the internal buzzer provides an additional acoustic signal for specifi c cases. Alarm or breakdown situations can then be reset at three differ-ent levels depending on the seriousness of the event: by a button located near the microprocessor, by a fi rst button on the front of the microprocessor unit and by a second button on the same panel that requires key selector activation (key in possession of the safety manager). A fourth reset level is then supplied for the circuit only (operation executable by authorized technical personnel only).

MANAGES- max. Nr. 5 RFC heat/smoke detectors- max. Nr. 5 alarm activation buttons- max. Nr. 2 electronic sirens- Nr. 4 EM or EMP electromagnets- Nr. 2 buffer batteries

Ø110

54

Technical data

operational temperature -40°C ÷ +60°Cconformity with EN 1154-5, EN 1154-7

235

Ac

ces

sor

ies

gla

zed

do

ors

Door-holding systemsFor fi re rated glazed doors

eLecTroNic sireN

Includes a volume control function for installation in inter-nal and external environments. The connection is made us-ing double clamps (6) for branching.

Technical datapower supply 9 ÷ 28 Vccabsorption by alarm at 12 V DC 8 mAabsorption by alarm at 24 V DC 16 mAprotection rating IP65operational temperature -25°C ÷ +70°Cconformity with standard EN 1154-3

ALArM AcTiVATioN BUTToN

Pressure on the plastic front plate activates the electrical contact. Re-arming of the contact is executed manually us-ing a key (provided).

Technical datapower supply max. 30 Vccprotection rating IP41operational temperature max. +65°Cinternal exchange contact n.o./n.c.conformity with standard EN 1154-11

eM eLecTroMAGNeT

EM wall electromagnet with white plastic casing, complete with unlock button. Anchor consisting of a nickel-plated plate and a jointed baseboard.

eMP eLecTroMAGNeT

EMP fl oor electromagnet, consisting of a galvanized metal core with an unlock button and a fastener plate. Anchor consisting of a nickel-plated plate and jointed baseboard.


With 28 or 32 selectable to-nes and a second tone for two-phase alarms.

Dimensions:Ø 91 x 91mm.

In red color ABS with a weight of 110 gr.

Dimensions:99 x 95 x 43mm.

6553

65

35

90

75

Technical datapower supply 24 Vccabsorption 60 mAminimum withstand force 55 Kg.EC certification 0407-CPD-011 (IG-098-2004) /02conformity with standard EN 1155

6553

65

114

70

104

Technical data

power supply 24 Vccabsorption 60 mAminimum withstand force 55 Kg.EC certification 0407-CPD-011 (IG-098-2004)conformity with standard EN 1155

eXU

s

236

Presentation EXUS® panic bars

PreseNTATioN

EXUS® panic barsNinz S.p.A. is a leader in fire doors and has once again reasserted itself as a visionary company with a strong identity created by its continuous research into the design and technology of its own products, such as the new line of EXUS® panic bars.EXUS® panic bars are marked in accordance with European standard EN 1125:2008, which entered in ef-fect January 01, 2010, and which prescribes a several substantial changes that further extend the require-ments for maximum safety and ease of opening.

The KIT designed for your needsWhen ordered separately from the door, the EXUS® series of panic bars is provided in elegant and functional KITs packaged for presentation in the most appropriate for-mat for distribution.Packaging in KITs ensures customers, installers and there-fore the final users that they are receiving a complete anti-panic system with fully corresponding parts that are all certified.

FinishingAttention to detail and proportions are highlighted by se-lect materials and finishing.In addition to the black NYLON version combined with anodized ALUMINUM bars, new combinations include the all satinized STAINLESS STEEL version and the pol-ished chromed ALUMINUM version combined with the anodized ALUMINUM bar. Many other color and surface combinations are possible for equally aesthetic solutions.The particular aesthetics of soft forms is one of the ex-clusive advantages of EXUS® panic bars, representing the fruit of designs generated in collaboration with Studio MM Design, which has been working with the company for many years.


conformity, a special focus has been put on replace-ment parts, which have been subjected to testing in ac-cordance with the EN 1125:2008 standard due to their pivotal role in maintaining certification.The only way to ensure that the products maintain their original characteristics over time is by using original NINZ replacement parts.For this reason, the instructions for EXUS® panic bars in-clude additional indications regarding proper installation and maintenance plus a explosion assembly drawing that specifies every smallest detail of the certified system with all of the references required for ordering replacement parts.

With the new EXUS® panic exit device, NINZ S.p.A. demonstrates its willingness to believe in market development by investing in designs and company image in order to endow its own products with added value while maintaining highly competitive quality-price ratios.

Stainless steel handle

eXU

s

237

eXU

s®

238

EXUS® is a registered trademark owned by Ninz S.p.A.

Also suited for doors with classifications up to:

REI 60 REI 90REI 30

EXUS® - Features, certifi cationsPanic bar

FeATUres

-- Newly designed product with a state-of-the-art tech-nological concept

-- Available in different color and surface combinations: satinized stainless steel for the lever arms and the bar, or aluminum with polished chrome lever arms and anodized aluminum bar, and fi nally the classic combi-nation that never goes out of style - black nylon lever arms with anodized aluminum bar

-- Certifi ed for internal locks with 40 mm entrances for single leaves or active leaves, with 30 mm entrances for secondary leaves and with up to 45° spindle rotation

-- Locking by key possible on the bar side as well-- Reversible for Right or Left mounting-- Protrusion 125 mm-- Proposed together with the door or separately in a

complete KIT packaged in a black/yellow box-- Label applied to the packaging to identify the prod-

uct‘s characteristics-- Wide range of variations to personalize: colored bar,

special encrypted or mastered cylinders

125

95

40

38

200

max. 1237

cerTiFicATioN

Suited for one-leaved doors or the active and secondary leaves of two-leaved doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/leaf, masses of 300 kg/leaf.

Denomination EXUS PANIC EXIT DEVICE

Manufacturer Ninz S.p.A. Corso Trento, 2/AI-38061 ALA (TN)/ITALIA

Year application trademark 08Nr. and year of the standard EN 1125:2008Certifying body 0425CE certificate Nr. 1228-CPD-2007Classification 3 7 7 B 1 3 2 1 A A

1st Category of use very frequent2nd Durability 200.000 cycles3rd Door mass over 200 kg4th Suitable for fire/smoke rated doors5th Safety, suitable for evacuation routes6th High corrosion resistance 96 h7th Material safety 1000 N8th Bar protrusion up to 150 mm9th Activation type with push bar10th Suitable for one- or two-leaved doors

eXU

s®

239

eXUs® LP iN BLAcK NYLoN

Description The EXUS LP panic exit device consists of an anodized alumi-num horizontal bar that inserts into the lever arms attached to the command mechanisms which activate the lock.

-- Reversible for right or left opening-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors-- The horizontal bar is made of extruded anodized alu-



nized steel with black nylon cover plates, one of which has an EXIT label that identifies the lock side

-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cylinders-- Stainless steel external door furniture (handle and rosette)-- DC version with double cylinder to pass

VersioNs AVAiLABLe

BM A DC BM

DC ELM ELM

eXUs LP (sUPPLieD WiTH THe Door)

For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors:Included (mounted on the door): panic lock and strike plate insertIncluded (supplied in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon cover plates, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 stainless steel external door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 double cylinder with 3 keys (DC version only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: BM, DC BM, DC ELM, ELMELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages

For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors:Included (mounted on the door): panic lock, upper re-latch device, upper strike plate and vertical rodsIncluded (supplied in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon cover plates, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: A

VAriATioNs oN reqUesT (see dedicated page)-- Aluminum bar painted in RAL colors-- Mastered or coded cylinders-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the

door is open

NOTE EXUS LP DC ELM and ELM versions not available for REI 90 and REI 120 glazed doors.

EXUS® LP BLACK NYLONPanic bar for internal locks - EN 1125:2008

eXU

s®

240

eXUs® LA iN ALUMiNUM

DescriptionThe entire EXUS LA panic bar is made of stainless steel, and consists of a horizontal bar that inserts into lever arms attached to the command mechanisms which acti-vate the lock. -- Reversible for right or left opening-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors-- The horizontal bar is made of extruded anodized alu-



-- The two command mechanisms are made of galva-nized steel with aluminum alloy cover plates with a polished chrome finish, one of which has an EXIT label to identify the lock side

-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cylinders-- Stainless steel door furnitures (handle and rosette) -- The arms, carters and backplates are finished with tri-

valent chrome in compliance with the ROSH regulation-- DC version with double cylinder to pass

VersioNs AVAiLABLe

BM A DC BM

DC ELM ELM

eXUs® LA (sUPPLieD WiTH THe Door)

For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors:Included (mounted on the door): panic lock and strike plate insertIncluded (supplied in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum cover plates, Nr. 2 polished chrome alumi-num lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 stainless steel external door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 double cylinder with 3 keys (DC version only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/mainte-nance instructionsVersions available: BM, DC BM, DC ELM, ELMELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages

For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doorsIncluded (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock, upper re-latch device, upper strike plate and vertical rodsIncluded (supplied in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum cover plates, Nr. 2 polished chrome alumi-num lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhe-sive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance in-structionsVersions available: A

VAriATioNs oN reqUesT (see dedicated page)

-- Aluminum bar painted in RAL colors-- Mastered or coded cylinders-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the

door is open

NOTE EXUS LA DC ELM and ELM versions not available for REI 90 and REI 120 glazed doors.

EXUS® LA ALUMINUMPanic bar for internal locks - EN 1125:2008

eXU

s®

241

eXUs® LX iN sTAiNLess sTeeL

DescriptionThe entire EXUS LX panic exit device is made of stainless steel, and consists of a horizontal bar that inserts into the lever arms attached to the command mechanisms which activate the lock.

-- Maximum corrosion resistance and noteworthy ro-bustness of the entire set

-- Optimal aesthetic appearance-- Reversible for right or left opening-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors-- The horizontal bar is made of AISI 304 satinized stain-

less steel with an elliptical cross-section measuring 40 x 20 mm, length of 1150 mm

-- The two lever arms are made of AISI 304 satinized stainless steel


-- The two backplates and the cover caps are made of AISI 304 satinized stainless steel, and one is labeled with EXIT to identify the lock side

-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cylinders-- External door furnitures in stainless steel-- DC version with double cylinder (feed-through)

VersioNs AVAiLABLe

BM A DC BM

DC ELM ELM

eXUs LX (sUPPLieD WiTH THe Door)

For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors:Included (mounted on the door): panic lock and strike plate insertIncluded (supplied in the package): Nr. 2 stainless steel command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel cover plates, Nr. 2 stainless steel lever arms, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar, Nr. 1 stainless steel external door furni-ture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 double cylinder with 3 keys (DC version only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: BM, DC BM, DC ELM, ELMELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages

For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doorsIncluded (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock, upper re-latch device, upper strike plate and vertical rodsIncluded (supplied in the package): Nr. 2 stainless steel command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel cover plates, Nr. 2 stainless steel lever arms, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: A


-- Mastered or coded cylinders-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the

door is open

NOTE EXUS LX DC ELM and ELM versions not available for REI 90 and REI 120 glazed doors.

EXUS® LX STAINLESS STEELPanic bar for internal locks - EN 1125:2008

242

Ac

ces

sor

ies

gla

zed

do

ors ToUcHBAr

Description-- Harmony of dimensions, lines and weight thanks to

precise design research makes Touchbar adaptable to any environment

-- Clean line with no protrusions, with lowered bar-- Clever manufacturing makes Touchbar installation sim-

ple and rapid on wood, iron and aluminum doors in com-bination with panic latches for series 43000 insertion

-- Touchbar made of quality materials and operational mechanisms to ensure efficiency and duration over time

Technical characteristics-- Reversible for right or left opening-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors-- Painted aluminum/aluminum alloy carters-- Painted aluminum bar that can be shortened down to

300 mm on any model-- Galvanized steel internal components suited for fire

doors-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cyl-

inders

Operation in standard configuration-- From the inside: pressing the bar; from the outside: by

key and/or handle

Standard finishing-- BLACK carter, RED bar-- Stainless steel door furnitures

VersioNs AVAiLABLe

BM A ELM

Touchbar CISA SBLOCKPanic bar for internal locks - EN 1125:2008

ToUcHBAr sUPPLieD ToGeTHer WiTH THe Door

For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors:Included (mounted on the door): panic lock and strike plate insertIncluded (supplied in the package): Nr. 1 TB panic bar set, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: BM, ELMELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages

For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doorsIncluded (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock, upper re-latch device, upper strike plate and vertical rodsIncluded (supplied in the package): Nr. 1 TB panic bar set, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructionsVersions available: A

DiMeNsioNs/eNcUMBrANces

74

144,

5

2530

38,5

L - 42L

33,5

50

32,5

43 90

16,5


-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the door is open

243

Ac

ces

sor

ies

gla

zed

do

ors

NoticesFor NINZ glazed fire doors

ATTENTIONGlazed doors and windows are required for internal compartmentali-zation and should be installed in areas that are protected from direct exposure to sunlight, other heat sources and atmospheric agents. If these products are used in locations exposed to direct sunlight, special paints must be used for this environment, and in such cases it is recom-mended to consult with our technical division.

Fire rated glass is sensitive to temperature, to water (humidity) and to the UV rays of solar radiation or particular forms of internal lighting.

Recommendations regarding the AMBIENT TEMPERATURE of the installation area.The glass remains stable in a temperature range of -40°C +50°C. Whenever the temperature of the glazed pane exceeds +50°C, the so-dium silicate understands such temperatures as fire-related and begins developing an irreversible opaqueness. Please contact us should the glazed pane ever exhibit any degree of opaqueness.The presence of an internal ventilation or air conditioning system could benefit the installation of fire rated glazed panes. First, however, it is necessary to verify the specific ambient conditions with our technical division. Please do not hesitate to contact us in this regard.

Recommendations regarding the presence of WATER or HU-MIDITY in the area of installation.The sodium silicate found in fire rated glass is water-soluble. If water gets inside the glass frame, or even in the presence of high levels of atmospheric humidity, therefore, the sodium silicate liquefies and cre-ates unsightly bubbles around the edges or even inside the glass, and these bubbles can increase in size over time. The fire rated properties of sodium silicate are nullified when it dissolves in water. For this rea-son, it is essential to take good care of the tape that seals the entire edge of the glass. This function of this tape is to keep water vapor out. Improper handling or usage that causes tears in the perimetral tape can create pathways through which water or humidity could attack the sodium silicate. Please contact us should any tears in the perimetral tape be detected during storage or installation.

Recommendations regarding the presence of UV RAYS in the installation area.The sodium silicate found within the layers of fire rated glass is sen-sitive to the UV rays of solar radiation and certain types of internal lighting. When the glass is exposed to sources of UV radiation, the sodium silicate polymerizes irreversibly and creates unsightly bubbles. At first the bubbles are only the size of the tip of a pin. With continued exposure, however, their size increases over time. Please consult the instructions contained in the “REI Product Handling” form.For this reason it is fundamental for the order form to indicate when fire rated glass is for EXTERNAL USE (exposure to the UV rays of solar radiation) or for use in the presence of UV-generating lamps.Improper storage of the material (at the work-site, for example) could also result in the emergence of unsightly bubbles over time. Therefore we invite you to follow with scrupulous attention the instructions con-tained in the “REI Product Handling” form.

Recommendations regarding the STORAGE of fire rated glazed panes.Fire rated glazed panes need to be stored in a vertical position (maxi-mum deviation of 6° from vertical) as reported in the “REI Product Handling” form. The utilization of standard glassmaker racks is optimal for this purpose because of how they allow for proper weight distribu-tion of the glazed pane and proper contact with the pane surface itself.Improper storage of fire rated glazed panes may create significant deformities in the panes (inflection or curvature). These types of de-formations are irreversible. If improper efforts are made to reverse the deformations, the glazed panes could break irreparably. Please contact us to avoid unpleasant inconveniences for which we cannot be held responsible.

Recommendations regarding the HANDLING of fire rated glazed panes.The production of fire rated glass involves the stratification of extra-clear float glass with sodium silicate. The limited mechanical strength of float glass makes it necessary to store the glass in a vertical posi-tion and never in a horizontal position. In the horizontal position, the load generated by the weight of the glass itself can cause the panes to break. Should one of the panes of the multi-layer glass break, the fire-resistance capacity and safety performance of the glass is not nec-essarily compromised.Panes of fire rated glass should never be rotated using one of their corners as a pivot point. Vertically-stored panels may at times need to be rotated by 90°. The considerable weight of large pieces of glass could induce workers to rotate such panels by pivoting the pane with only one corner touching the ground. The concentration of the pane’s weight on a single corner could very well cause the glass to break.Fire rated glass may be handled using the normal suction pads used by glassmakers.

Installation should only be executed by qualified technicians.The installation instructions indicate the only allowable modifications.Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.The bearing capacity of the walls and crossbeams involved needs to be verified due to the considerable weight of glazed doors.

Ninz reserves the right to make unannounced technical changes to any of the contents of this entire form. All meas-urements are in mm.

Ninz reserves the right to modify the product. For any ad-ditional clarifications, our technical division is available with special forms to fill out to stylize your order or request es-timates.

Reproduction (partial or total) requires prior authorization by Ninz. All rights reserved.

Ninz S.p.A. | Corso Trento 2/A | I-38061 Ala (TN)

Tel. +39 0464 678 300 | Fax +39 0464 679 025

[email protected] | www.ninz.it

5002

009/

2 -

C10

EDIT

ION

01/

2011

d

ate

of

pri

nt:

01.

12.2

010

Business

Brochure 2011 lo-res